JP2016005799A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine effectively reduced in control load caused by output of a state generation signal to an external device such as a hall computer.SOLUTION: In a game machine, every time the output of a state generation signal is started, from the start of the output of the state generation signal, first after a first period which is the output period of the signal is measured, and subsequently a preset second period is measured as an OFF period from the end of the output of the signal. Therefore, both the management on the output period (that is, the first period) of the state generation signal and the management on a predetermined period (that is, the second period) after the end of the output of the state generation signal can be achieved without conducting the processing for setting in period measuring means according to the timing of starting measurement on each period. Accordingly, the control load caused by outputting the state generation signal to an arithmetic unit at every generation of the state can be reduced.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

  Conventionally, centralized management by a hall computer has been carried out on gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slots installed in game halls (for example, Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2). Examples of such centralized management include, for example, a starting opening prize signal indicating that a gaming ball has won a predetermined winning opening (for example, a starting opening that generates a chance to win a big hit by winning a gaming ball) Signals corresponding to various states that occur during the game, such as a winning ball signal indicating that the ball has been paid out by winning the winning opening, and a big hit signal indicating the big hit state (hereinafter, this signal is referred to as a “state generation signal”). Is output from each gaming machine to the hall computer, and the hall computer that receives these signals receives a number of balls per jackpot based on the received signals, One example is calculating the number of balls (base) and outputting the result to a monitor or paper.

  As described above, data output from the hall computer, for example, data such as the number of balls played per jackpot, the number of balls played other than during the jackpot, and the number of game balls that have passed through the start opening, obtain appropriate profits. For the purpose, it is used by hall managers for nail adjustment of pachinko machines and fraud monitoring.

  Here, the output of the state generation signal from each gaming machine to the hall computer is started by generating an on signal in which the output state is inverted when a predetermined state occurs, and then the hall computer transmits the on signal. It is terminated by continuing to output the ON signal for a first period (for example, 0.5 s) in which the output state can be detected and then inverting the output state again.

  On the other hand, in order for the hall computer to distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series, after the output of the state generation signal by inverting the output state again, the output state is changed to a second period (for example, 0 .5s) need to continue. Therefore, when the gaming machine outputs the state generation signal to the hall computer, the first period that is the output period of the ON signal that becomes the state generation signal can be distinguished from the state generation signal that the hall computer is adjacent in time series. The gaming machine is required to manage the second period, which is the period.

  One common method for the gaming machine to manage the first period and the second period is as follows. The first counter that measures the first period (that is, the output period of the state generation signal), A second counter that measures two periods (that is, a period necessary for the hall computer to distinguish the next state generation signal after completion of the output of the state generation signal), and measures each of these periods. Is the method.

In such a method, for example, when the occurrence of a predetermined state is detected and the output of the state generation signal is started by the generation of the ON signal in which the output state is inverted, the output of the state generation signal is started. An initial value corresponding to one period is set in the first counter, and the first period is measured by sequentially subtracting the value of the first counter. When the value of the first counter indicates zero, that is, when the output of the state generation signal is finished, the second period is set in the second counter, and the second counter The second period is measured by sequentially subtracting the values of.
Alternatively, there is a method in which the gaming machine manages both the first period and the second period with one counter as another method for managing the first period and the second period. In such a method, for example, when it is detected that a predetermined state has occurred and the output of the state generation signal is started by generating an ON signal in which the output state is inverted, the first period is set in the counter, The first period is measured by sequentially subtracting the counter value. When the counter value indicates zero, that is, when the output of the state generation signal is completed, the second period is set in the counter, and the counter value is sequentially subtracted. The period of 2 is measured.

JP-A-7-59935 JP 2005-334218 A

  However, any of the above-described methods requires processing for setting the first period and the second period in a counter or timer according to the measurement start timing of each period, and the control by the control device is complicated. There was a problem of becoming. In particular, in the former method, it is necessary to provide a plurality of counters and timers according to the number of periods to be managed, and the consumption of storage capacity in the storage device increases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine that effectively reduces the control load accompanying the output of a state generation signal to an external device such as a hall computer. It is an object.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 causes a predetermined state during a game in which a game medium is passed through the game area and a game value is given to the player in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition. A state detecting means for detecting the state and after the occurrence of one state detected by the state detecting means, the signal output state is inverted from the first state and maintained for a preset first period And a signal output means for outputting a state generation signal of 1 by inverting again and returning to the first state, and when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means, A period measuring unit that measures an elapsed period from when the output of the state generation signal is started, and a first that can determine whether the elapsed period measured by the period measuring unit has reached the first period Arrival determination The elapsed period measured by the period measuring means after the stage and the first arrival determining means determines that the elapsed period has reached the first period is the first period. Second arrival determination means capable of determining whether or not a sum period with a preset second period has been reached.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means, the sum of the first period and the second period. A period setting unit configured to set a value corresponding to a period as an initial value in the period measuring unit; and the period measuring unit is configured to start the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit; The elapsed period is measured by a method of subtracting a set value.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein in the second period, the state generation signal in which the arithmetic unit that is the output destination of the state generation signal is adjacent in time series. It is a period that can be distinguished.

  A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, wherein the first period and the second period are substantially the same.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the occurrence of a predetermined state during the game in which the game medium is passed through the game area and the game value is given to the player according to establishment of the predetermined condition is caused by the state detection means. If it is detected, one state generation signal is output by the signal output means for one occurrence of the detected state. Here, the one state generation signal is generated by inverting the output state of the signal from the first state and maintaining it for a preset first period, and then inverting it again to return to the first state. .

  In such a case, when the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), the elapsed period from the start of the output of the state generation signal Measurement is started by the period measuring means. When measurement of the elapsed period by the period measuring unit is started, first, the first arrival determination unit determines whether the elapsed period has reached the first period, that is, the signal output state is inverted again and the first It is determined whether it is time to return to the state.

  Then, when the first arrival determining means determines that the elapsed period measured by the period measuring means has reached the first period, the elapsed period has subsequently reached the second period set in advance. Is determined. Here, the second period is a period in which a state generation signal can be distinguished in time series by an arithmetic device (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine) that is the output destination of the state generation signal. In this case, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be reliably discriminated by the output destination arithmetic unit. As a result, it is possible to reliably cause the output destination arithmetic device to detect the occurrence of the state detected by the state detecting means.

  Therefore, both the management of the output period of the state generation signal (that is, the first period) and the management of the predetermined period (that is, the second period) after the end of the output of the state generation signal are measured for each period. This can be realized without performing processing for setting the period measurement means in accordance with the start timing. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the control load associated with outputting the state generation signal to the arithmetic device every time the state is generated.

  The passage from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means to the first period extends from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means to the sum period of the first period and the second period. Therefore, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as counters and timers as period measuring means, and there is an effect that consumption of storage capacity in the storage device can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effect is obtained. When output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), a value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is It is set in the period setting means as an initial value. Thereafter, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started, the elapsed period from the start of the output of the state generation signal is measured by the period measurement means by a method of subtracting the value set by the period setting means. The

  Therefore, since the value set as the initial value in the period measuring unit is a value corresponding to the total period of the first period and the second period, by setting the initial value once in the period measuring unit, It is possible to measure both the progress up to the first period and the total period of the first period and the second period, and the control associated with outputting the state generation signal to the arithmetic unit every time the state occurs There is an effect that the load can be reduced.

  Further, from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means to the first period by the period measuring means in which the value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is set as the initial value. Since both the elapsed time and the elapsed time up to the sum period of the first period and the second period can be measured, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as a counter and a timer as the period measuring means, and the storage device There is an effect that consumption of storage capacity can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. The second period after the completion of the output of the state generation signal distinguishes the state generation signals adjacent to each other in time series by the arithmetic device that is the output destination of the state generation signal (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine) Since the possible period is set, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be surely distinguished from each other by the output destination arithmetic unit. As a result, there is an effect that the generation of the state detected by the state detection unit can be surely detected by the output destination arithmetic device.

According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is produced. The first period and the second period are substantially the same, that is, it is necessary for the output state arithmetic unit to be able to distinguish the output state of the state generation signal from the next state generation signal after the end of the output of the state generation signal. This is advantageous in that the management of each period can be facilitated. In addition, the difference between the occurrence timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal can be reduced, and the data acquisition efficiency can be improved.
Here, by setting the second period as a period in which the state generation signal adjacent to the arithmetic unit that is the output destination of the state generation signal in time series can be distinguished, the management of each period is facilitated. The state generation signals adjacent in series can be surely distinguished from each other by the output destination arithmetic unit. In particular, the difference between the generation timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal is reduced by setting the second period to be the shortest period in which the signal can be detected by the output destination arithmetic unit or a period in the vicinity of the shortest period. Data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which shows typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrates an actual display screen. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in the symbol change process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating external information processing executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 11. It is a timing chart which shows the output timing of a 1st entrance opening signal. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the switch monitoring process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the switch monitoring process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. (A) is a flowchart which shows an upper stage operation port switch process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a lower stage operation port switch process. (A) is a flowchart which shows an upper 1st operation port switch process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a lower 1st operation port switch process. (A) is a flowchart which shows an upper 1st prize port switch process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a lower 1st prize port switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the external information processing performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the output timing of a specific operation port passage signal.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window portion 14 c of the front frame 14. Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner circumference 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 surround the front and rear. A game area to be played is formed. The game area is a substantially circular area that is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37b is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area as viewed from the front (upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being probabilistically changing, operating in a short time, or in a normal state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state, and the symbols corresponding to the probable big hit. Whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an out-of-game symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color. .

  In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 being probable is a game state in which the jackpot probability is increased and it is easy to shift to the special game state. Furthermore, during the probability change in this embodiment, the game is in a state where the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is short-running, it means a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). . In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased). It should be noted that, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 and the number of times the electric accessory is released per hit are changed. It is good as a thing.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance 64 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device 82 composed of a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) that variably displays the second symbol with the passage of the ball of the second entrance 67 as a trigger.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, and for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 includes a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Is arranged. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 until the stop symbol (any one of the probable jackpot symbol, the normal jackpot symbol, or the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of entered balls is held up to 4 times, and the number of held times is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the number of lights of the holding lamp 85. Four hold lamps 85 are provided for the maximum number of holds, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning at the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more. In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically held in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) by the frequency | count. In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not perform lighting display.

  The second symbol display device 82 includes a second symbol display unit 83 and a holding lamp 84, and each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the display unit 83 displays a display symbol (second symbol). The symbol “○” and “x” in FIG. 1 are alternately lit to display a variation, and the variation display is stopped when the variation display stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol “◯”). The entrance 64 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of passes through the second entrance 67 of the sphere is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit on the hold lamp 84. The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps on the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. You may make it carry out using a part of. Similarly, the hold lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, and is not limited to 4 times, or 3 times or less (for example, (8 times). In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. As a result, the main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a and a large opening opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (FIG. 4)). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. Can be visually recognized through the small window 35.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 and a second entrance (through gate) 67. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 has an external output buffer 203a, a first entrance passage counter 203b, and a signal output management counter 203c. Here, the external output buffer 203 a is a buffer that stores setting data of a predetermined size (for example, 1 byte) to be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  The external output buffer 203a is composed of a plurality of setting data bits, and each setting data bit is in a state to be managed during the game (for example, to the first entrance 64 which is a winning entrance that triggers a big winning lottery. A value of 0 (off) or 1 (on) is set according to whether or not the ball has entered (passed) or whether or not the game is a big hit.

  Setting of values in the external output buffer 203a (that is, setting of values in each setting data bit) is updated at an interval of 2 ms that is an execution interval of external information processing (see FIG. 13). As described above, the setting data updated every 2 ms is stored in the external output terminal plate 261 every time the external output process is performed in the main process (see FIG. 8) with 4 ms as one cycle (that is, at intervals of 4 ms). To the hall computer 262.

  The first entrance opening counter 203b is a counter that counts a state in which a ball has passed through the first entrance 64 but the first entrance passage signal corresponding to the passage has not been output. Note that the “first entrance opening passage signal” is an ON signal (see FIG. 14) that is output over a predetermined period (in this embodiment, for 52 ms) with respect to one pass to the first entrance 64. ).

  The first entrance pass counter 203b is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on, and then each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 (that is, the first entrance switch (a part of various switches 208). 1) is added (every time ON) is detected, and 1 is subtracted in external information processing (see FIG. 13) described later every time one first entrance pass signal is output.

  Therefore, if the value of the first entrance port passage counter 203b is 0, the number of first entrance port passage signals corresponding to the number of times the ball has passed to the first entrance port 64 passes through the external output terminal plate 261. It is transmitted to the hall computer 262. On the other hand, when the first entrance passage counter 203b shows a value of 1 or more, the passage of the sphere to the first entrance 64 is detected by the number indicated by the first entrance passage counter 203b. Nevertheless, it indicates that there is a first entry port passing signal that has not been output to the hall computer 262 (not transmitted or waiting).

  The signal output management counter 203c is an output period (first period) of the first entrance pass signal and a period after the output of the first entrance pass signal, and the hall computer 262 arrives next. It is a counter that measures (measures) both the off period (second period) in which the first entrance opening passing signal can be distinguished.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in managing the output period of the first entrance port passing signal to the hall computer 262, as the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c, A value corresponding to the sum period of the period (the output period of the first entrance pass signal) and the second period (the subsequent off period) is set. The control load of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 can be reduced with the output of the first entrance port passing signal.

  In addition to the buffers and counters described above, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. Is stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 8), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 7). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interruption process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a specific prize. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the port 65a as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the external output terminal plate 261 are connected.

  The external output terminal board 261 is configured so that a hall computer 262 can be connected thereto. The external output terminal board 261 receives data output from the main controller 110 (setting data stored in the external output buffer 203a) and relays the data to the hall computer 262.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has an external output buffer (not shown). The external output buffer in the payout control device 111 is a predetermined size (for example, 1) that is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261, similarly to the external output buffer 203a provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Byte) setting data, and includes a plurality of setting data bits (for example, setting data bits for a prize ball signal indicating whether or not a predetermined number of prize balls have been paid out).

  Similarly to the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the RAM 213 stores a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 211, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 211, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which a value such as O is stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, the external output terminal plate 261, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  As described above, the external output terminal board 261 configured to be connected to the hall computer 262 is the data output from the payout control device 111 (setting data stored in an external output buffer (not shown)). And relay the data to the hall computer 262.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 on the condition that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. Then, the launch solenoid is excited, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is a voice output in a voice output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and the display control device 114. The setting of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 performed etc. is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The display control device 114 controls the change display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. It has. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the symbol display command input from the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

  The character ROM 235 has a character information memory (not shown) in which character information such as symbols (background symbols and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. Character information stored in the character information memory (not shown) includes numerical data of the third symbol (for example, 0 to 9) that is variably displayed, and symbol data other than the numerical data (for example, a box symbol or a helmet symbol). Design (see FIG. 5B)), background design, notice character design, character design (for example, boy (see FIG. 5B)), and the like.

  Each character information stored in the character information memory 235a is stored as compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In this embodiment, the character information is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the character information of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character information memory. Character information stored as compressed data in the character information memory is read and decompressed, and then written to a character information storage area (not shown) in the video RAM 234.

  The video RAM 234 is a storage area for display (not shown) in which effect data corresponding to display contents (effect display pattern of variable display, effect contents at reach effect, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. And a character information storage area (not shown) for storing character information decompressed after being read from the character information memory of the character ROM 235.

  A display storage area (not shown) is an area for storing effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By rewriting the contents of the display storage region, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents are changed. In the character information storage area, character information (character data) as a material such as background symbols and decorative symbols is stored, and necessary data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored from the character information storage area. It is read out and written into the display storage area in the video RAM 234.

  The reason why the character information is stored in the character information storage area of the video RAM 234 is that the processing speed is generally higher in the RAM than in the ROM, and the character information is displayed in the video RAM 234 directly from the character ROM 235. This is because if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes a long time to read and smooth display cannot be performed or clear display cannot be performed. Further, this is because it is easy to process display data in the video RAM 234 (for example, change the size of a decorative design or change the color of a background design).

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (not shown), store the information on the occurrence of power interruption in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213, and complete it.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data and the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data. A payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9” and one type of sub-shaped petal shape formed smaller than this main symbol. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box almost fully, and attached symbols imitating characters such as furoshiki and helmets are added. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. It is configured as follows. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added is arranged. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are arranged. Here, the high probability state refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). Further, the normal state (low probability state) refers to a time when the probability of hitting is not probable, and refers to a state where the probability of jackpot is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that during probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. For this reason, a total of 20 third symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub-designs are set in each symbol row, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scrolls from top to bottom with periodicity. The display is changed. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. In the main display area Dm, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set. In each game, the variable display stops in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and the combination of jackpot symbols on one of the active lines at the time of the stop (in this embodiment, the same Jackpot animations are displayed as jackpots.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are usually covered with double-open opaque doors that are electrically opened and closed by solenoids (not shown), and sometimes the solenoids are excited and the doors are on the front side. It is a display area that is visible to the player when it is opened. The center notice area Ds2 is a display area that is always visible without being covered by the door.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols and sub-designs of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are covered and the display screen cannot be visually recognized. If either one of the left and right doors or both doors are opened during the variable display, a video is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and it is easy for the player to change to a big hit than usual. It is suggested. In the center notice area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds in principle, but the third symbol and characters are displayed larger across the display areas Dm and Ds. A display effect can be performed.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 8), or at an interval of 2 ms, an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11), and the updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Stored in the counter buffer. The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball winning timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) is executed. It is updated once and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 8). The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in The number of random number values that are jackpots is set at low probability and high probability, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots at low probability is 2, and the value is “373, 727” There are 14 random numbers that are big hits at high probability, and the values are "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733".

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit, and in this embodiment, one by one is added in order within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value (that is, After reaching 4), it is configured to return to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in In addition, the value of the random number that becomes a high probability state after the jackpot is “1, 2, 3”, the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the jackpot is “0, 4”, and two types of hits are determined. The Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots of a high probability state and a low probability state, and one type of display mode corresponding to a deviation. Any one of the three display modes is selected.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than out of front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) after the occurrence of reach, and the final stop symbol is stopped before and after the reach symbol. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected as “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored.

  Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random number values from which the stop pattern is selected. This is based on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored (that is, the number of reservations), etc. This is to change the stop pattern selection ratio.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide random value range of 10 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected so that a jackpot is likely to occur and a reach effect is not selected more than necessary. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9, making it difficult to select “rear out of front / rear out of reach” or “reach out of front / rear out of reach”. Further, if each random number value is not stored in the holding ball storage area in a low probability state, a disturbance corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely off” in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. A table with a narrow numerical value range of 51 to 238 is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 9 to 50, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and therefore, the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. On the other hand, the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined by the first variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines a variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops after the reach occurs. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 8) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

  For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third variation type counter”. The 3rd symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs the decorative production according to the display mode of the 1st symbol display device 37. A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, the time required for the notice effect is added to the variable time, or on the contrary, the variable time is subtracted to shorten the variable display time, or an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the variable time is selected. . As with the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables with different ranges of random values from which the production pattern is selected, and whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. Depending on the low probability state or in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random value is stored, the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Get when it is done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 8).

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer allocation that is started periodically (in a 2 ms cycle in this embodiment). And NMI interrupt processing described above.

  First, referring to FIG. 7, a startup process when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance in the stack pointer is set, and the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. In order to wait, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 123. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 123 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the main process executed after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted (output) to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side and the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. (S201). By this external output process (S201), for example, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S501 (see FIG. 11) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the number of acquired balls to the payout control device 111 A prize ball command corresponding to is sent. Also, by this external output processing (S201), the fluctuation pattern command, stop symbol command, stop command, effect time addition command, etc. necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. When transmitting or launching a sphere, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Further, the external output processing (S201) causes the data (setting data) set in the external output buffer 203a according to the state of the game in the external information processing (see FIG. 13) to be described later via the external output terminal board 261. To the hall computer 262.

  Each setting data bit constituting the setting data includes a setting data bit that is set to 1 (turned on) when a ball enters the first entrance 64. One first entrance pass signal is formed according to the output state of the data bits.

  More specifically, the first first entrance signal passes through the output state of the corresponding setting data bit from 0 (off), which is the initial state, to 1 (on), and then (in this embodiment, 52 ms). Later, when the output state is returned to 0 (off) again, it is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  Similarly, each setting data bit constituting the setting data stored in the external output buffer 203a includes a setting data bit that is set to 1 when a big hit occurs, and the output state of this setting data bit In response to this, a signal of one big hit is formed. That is, the output state of the corresponding setting data bit is inverted from 0 (off) to 1 (on) with the occurrence of the jackpot, and then the output state is returned to 0 (off) again with the end of the jackpot. One big hit signal is output to the hall computer 262 through the external output terminal board 261.

  Next, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2, and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the big win state (S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is obtained. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (not shown) is executed, the process at the time of power-off after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). It transmits to (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the variation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 8). In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of active suspension balls is greater than 0 (S303). If the number N of active balls is 0 (S303: No), this process is terminated as it is. If the number of the operation hold balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the operation hold ball number N is decremented by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the hold ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and the reserved first area → execution area, reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area. After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the change type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). Whether or not the stop symbol is set is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit, the symbol that becomes a high probability state after the big hit by the value of the first hit type counter C2 Or a symbol that is in a low probability state is determined. In this embodiment, a red LED is turned on when a high probability state is reached after a big hit, a green LED is turned on when a low probability state is reached, and a blue LED is turned on when it is out of place. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S309, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S310). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this stop command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and receives the stop command, whereby one variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 ends.

  Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) executed in the change process (see FIG. 9). In the variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, “373,727” is a winning value among the values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1 at the normal low probability, and “59,109,163, 211,263,317,367, "421,479,523,631,683,733" is the winning value.

  When it is determined that it is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode for the big hit is set (S402). ). In the process of S402, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, whether to shift to the high probability state or shift to the low probability state after the big hit is set. When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit by the process of S402. Of the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, when “0, 4”, the state shifts to the low probability state, and when “1, 2, 3”, the state shifts to the high probability state. .

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. The At this time, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and rough symbol fluctuations such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition to determining the variation time, the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. To do.

  The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation time, and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are respectively defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the fluctuation time can be set using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and can be set only with the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Whether or not to set with both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time.

  If it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, An effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to indicate whether the reach is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 varies depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state and the number of operation suspensions N. So the table is set up.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the detachment symbol. Is determined. At this time, as in the process of S403, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and the normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 , The number of variation symbols).

  When the process of S403 or the process of S405 is completed, the effect time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by the first and second type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S406). At this time, the addition / subtraction of effect time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display The variation time of the device 81 is set. In this embodiment, the addition / subtraction of the production time is determined according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3 when the variation display time is not changed and when the variation display time is added for one second, the variation display time is set to 2 seconds. In the case of addition, four types of addition values for the case of subtracting 1 second from the variable display time are determined.

  In addition, when the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect that increases the expected value of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect that causes the change time of the variable symbol to be longer than usual and is accompanied by a slip) An effect of displaying a notice character is produced, for example, an effect of making the change time of one change symbol shorter than usual and stopping it immediately). In addition, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that an added value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, so that the player expects a big hit by confirming the notice effect. Can do.

  Next, a variation pattern command is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in S403 or S405 (S407), and a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in S402 or S404. (S408). Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the effect time addition value determined in the process of S406 (S409), and the process returns to the variation process.

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When reaching 738, 4, 238, 250), respectively, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  After that, a start winning process (see FIG. 12) associated with winning at the first entrance 64 is executed (S504), and external information for setting the first entrance pass signal to be output to the hall computer 262, etc. The process (see FIG. 13) is executed (S505), the firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with a touch sensor and turns on / off the launch of the ball on the condition that the launch stop switch for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining OFF. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Here, the start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 11).

  When this start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first entrance pass counter 203b (S602).

  After the process of S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of actuated balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603). If there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the number N of activated balls is <4 (S603: Yes), the number N of activated balls is incremented by 1 (S604), and further updated in step S503. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the free reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S605). On the other hand, if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the number N of operation reservation balls is not less than 4 (S603: No). , S604 and S605 are skipped, the start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the external information processing executed in the process of S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing external information processing (S505) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 13, in this external information processing (S505), first, the external output buffer 203a is cleared to 0, that is, all the setting data bits are cleared to 0, and the setting data is cleared (S1501).

  After the processing of S1501, it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1502). If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 as a result of checking in the processing of S1502 (S1502: Yes), the hall computer 262 is in a state where the next first incoming ball passing signal can be distinguished (detected). In this case, it is confirmed whether the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is 0 (S1503).

  As a result of the confirmation in S1503, when the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is not 0, that is, a value greater than 0 is confirmed (S1502: No), the ball to the first entrance 64 This is a case where there is a first ball pass signal that has not been output to the hall computer 262 (not yet transmitted, in standby), even though the passage of the vehicle is detected. Therefore, in such a case, after 1 is subtracted from the value of the first entrance pass counter 203b (S1504), 52 is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c (S1505), and the time is measured by the signal output management counter 203c. Start (measurement).

  When 52 is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c as a result of the processing in S1505, thereafter, every time this external information processing (S505) is executed until the value of the signal output management counter 203c becomes 0. In addition, the processing of S1509 is executed, and 1 is subtracted each time. Here, since this external information processing (S505) is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 11) executed at intervals of 2 ms, 52 is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c. As a result, a period of 104 ms is counted.

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is not 0, that is, if a value greater than 0 is confirmed (S1502: No), the signal output management counter 203c is measuring the time. Since there is, 1 is subtracted from the value of the signal output management counter 203c (S1509).

  After the processing of S1505 or S1509, it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 26 (S1506). If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 26 (S1506: Yes), the first entry Since the first period (52 ms in this embodiment), which is the output period of the first entrance port passing signal, has not yet elapsed since the output of the mouth passing signal is started, the first output in the external output buffer 203a The setting data bit corresponding to the entrance pass signal is set to 1 (S1507), and the flow proceeds to other setting processing (S1508).

  As a result of the processing of S1507, the external output processing (S201) in the main processing (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is performed in a state where 1 is set in the setting data bit corresponding to the first entrance port passing signal in the external output buffer 203a. ) Is executed, the first entrance port passing signal which is an ON signal is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261.

  On the other hand, when the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 26 or less (S1506: No) as a result of checking by the processing of S1506, the output period of the first entrance pass signal has ended, so S1507 Without moving to other setting processing (S1508).

  Here, as described above, every time the external information processing (S505) is executed, the processing of S1501 is executed first, and the external output buffer 203a is cleared to 0, so that the No branch processing in S1506 is executed. Therefore, when S1507 is skipped, the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the first entrance pass signal remains 0 (off). Therefore, when the branch process of No in S1506 is executed, the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is not the first entrance pass signal (ON signal), An off-state signal is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  Therefore, according to this external information processing (S505), when the branch process of Yes in S1506 is executed, that is, after the output of the first entrance pass signal is started, the first entrance pass signal Until the first period which is the output period elapses, the process of S1507 is executed. As a result, the first entrance is passed to the hall computer 262 over the first period (52 ms in this embodiment). A signal will be output.

  On the other hand, when the branch process of No in S1506 is executed, 1507 is skipped. Therefore, the second period is set as the off period after the first entrance pass signal is output over the first period. The period, that is, the period (52 ms in the present embodiment) in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the first entrance opening passing signals adjacent in time series, is counted.

  If the value of the first entrance opening passage counter 203b is 0 as a result of the confirmation in the process of S1503 (S1502: Yes), the first entrance opening being timed (managed) by the signal output management counter 203c. Since there is neither a passing signal nor a first entrance port passing signal to be output, the process proceeds to other setting processing (S1508).

  In the other setting process (S1508), setting data bits corresponding to signals other than the first entrance opening signal in the external output buffer 203a (for example, a jackpot signal) are updated. After executing the other setting processing (S1508), the external information processing (S505) is terminated and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the external information processing (S505) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the first first entrance pass signal is output to the hall computer 262, the first entrance pass signal is output. A signal output with a value corresponding to a sum period (in this embodiment, 104 ms) of the first period, which is the output period of the first, and the second period after the completion of the output of the first entrance-passing signal as an initial value The management counter 203c is set so that both of these periods (first period and second period) can be managed by only one counter signal output management counter 203c).

  The first advantage of such a configuration is that there is no need to separately prepare a counter for measuring the first period and a counter for measuring the second period, thereby suppressing consumption of storage capacity in the RAM 203. It is a point that can be.

  As a second advantage, two periods (first period) can be obtained without setting a value corresponding to each period at the timing of timing start of each period (first period or second period) in the signal output management counter 203c. And the second period), the control load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced in accordance with the output of the first entrance pass signal to the hall computer 262. It is done.

  Further, according to this external information processing (S505), the number of states in which a ball has passed through the first entrance 64 but the first entrance pass signal corresponding to the passage has not been output (waiting). When the value of the counter 203b is 1 or more, when the signal output management counter 203c becomes 0, the branch processing of Yes in S1503 is executed. Then, the output of the first first entrance pass signal that has been waiting is started.

  That is, when a ball has passed through the first entrance 64 but the first entrance pass signal is being output, the first entrance pass signal cannot be output immediately. From the end of the first entrance pass signal, until the second period in which the hall computer 262 can detect the next first entrance pass signal has passed, Output is awaited. As a result, since the hall computer 262 can reliably distinguish (detect) the individual first entrance pass signals, the passage (winning) of the ball to the first entrance 64 detected every moment, The hall computer 262 can be surely recognized.

  Next, referring to FIG. 14, the first entrance pass signal output from the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment to the hall computer 262 (the output state of the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is 1). Will be described. FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing the output timing of the first entrance pass signal in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 14, a detection signal sg1 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the first entrance 64 is output from the first entrance switch (a part of the various switches 208). When the passage of the sphere to the first entrance 64 is detected by the first entrance switch, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the 1 detection signal sg1 (ie, The output of the first first entrance opening signal ON1 for one winning) is started.

  In starting the output of the first entrance opening signal ON1, the processing of S1505 in the external information processing (see FIG. 13) is executed, and an initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c is such that the output period of the first entrance pass signal ON1 and the hall computer 262 can distinguish the next first entrance pass signal. This value is equivalent to the sum period (in this embodiment, 104 ms) with the off period OF1.

  During the time counting by the signal output management counter 203c, it is determined that the output period (52 ms in this embodiment) of the first entrance port passing signal has elapsed by the determination processing of S1506 in the external information processing (see FIG. 13). Then, by returning the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a from 1 to 0, the output of the first entrance pass signal ON1 is ended.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 104 ms, which is the sum period of the output period of the first entrance opening signal ON1 and the off period OF1, is set in the signal output management counter 203c as an initial value. Even when the signal output management counter 203c measures the output period of 52 ms, the value of the signal output management counter 203c does not reach 0. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the signal output management counter 203c sets an initial value for measuring the off period OF1 even after the output of the first entrance pass signal ON1 is completed. The OFF period OF1 (in this embodiment, 52 ms) can be continuously counted without any problem.

  On the other hand, before the value of the signal output management counter 203c, whose initial value is set with the start of output of the first entrance pass signal ON1, reaches 0, that is, in the present embodiment, the first entrance If a new detection signal sg2 is output from the first entrance switch before 104 ms elapses from the start of output of the passage signal ON1, it waits for the value of the signal output management counter 203c to reach zero. After that, the output of the first entrance opening signal ON2 with respect to the detection signal sg2 is started.

  That is, the first entrance pass signal ON2 with respect to the detection signal sg2 is set in advance so that the hall computer 262 can distinguish the first entrance pass signal ON2 after the output of the first entrance pass signal ON1. The output is awaited until the off period OF1 has elapsed. Thus, since the first entrance opening signal ON2 is output after the off period OF1 has elapsed after the end of the output of the first entrance entrance signal ON1, the hall computer 262 receives the first entrance entrance signal ON2. The passage signal ON2 can be reliably detected.

  In addition, when the output of the first entrance opening signal ON2 is started, the signal output management counter 203c includes the first entrance opening pass signal as in the case of the first entrance entrance signal ON1. A value corresponding to the sum period of the output period of ON2 and the off period OF2 is set as an initial value, and a new detection signal is output from the first entrance switch before the value of the signal output management counter 203c reaches 0. In the case of the output, the first entrance pass signal corresponding to the new detection signal is output after the OFF period OF2 has passed since the end of the output of the first entrance pass signal ON2. Become.

  On the other hand, when a new detection signal sg3 is output from the first entrance switch after the value of the signal output management counter 203c becomes 0, the initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c. Output of the first entrance opening signal ON3 with respect to the detection signal sg3 is started.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the first entrance pass signal is output to the hall computer 262, the output of the first entrance pass signal (ON signal) is started. At the same time, the timing of the period is started. After the start of such timing, it is first determined whether or not the first period, which is the output period of the signal, has elapsed, and if it is determined that the first period has elapsed, Subsequent to the time measurement, the hall computer 262 measures the second period, which is an off period in which the first entrance port passing signals adjacent in time series can be distinguished. Then, in order to determine the arrival of the second period, whether or not the second period has elapsed, that is, from the output of the first entrance pass signal, the first period and the second period A determination is made whether the summing period has elapsed.

  Therefore, the management of the output period (that is, the first output period) of the first entrance port passing signal and the off period (that is, the second output period) after the output of the first entrance port passing signal ends. Management can be realized without setting the period to be timed according to the timing of timing start of each period. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load applied to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in accordance with the output of the first entrance pass signal that is performed every time the ball enters the first entrance 64 (winning).

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the output of the first entrance opening signal is started, a value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is output as the initial value. By setting to the management counter 203c and counting down every predetermined time, both the first period and the second period are counted by the one counter (signal output management counter 203c).

  Therefore, there is no need to separately prepare a counter for counting the first period and a counter for counting the second period, and consumption of storage capacity in the RAM 203 can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, the first period set in advance as the output period of the first entrance port passing signal and the second period set in advance as the off period after the output of the first entrance port passing signal ends. Although the period is configured as the same value (52 ms), these periods are not limited to being the same, and even if the first period is longer than the second period, the first period is The period may be shorter than the second period.

  Here, the management of each period can be facilitated by setting the first period and the second period to the same or substantially the same value. In particular, the second period is defined as the shortest period during which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the first entrance passage signals adjacent in time series, or a neighboring period longer than the shortest period (for example, the shortest period is a number). If the first period and the second period are set to the same or substantially the same value, there is an unoutputted (standby) first entrance pass signal. In addition, the timing at which the ball has passed through the first entrance 64 (the timing at which the ball has been detected by the first entrance switch) and the output of the first entrance passage signal to be output next during standby. The difference from the timing can be reduced. Therefore, the time required for the output period and the output OFF period can be shortened as a whole for one first entrance signal, and data (this embodiment illustrating the first entrance signal) In the form, winning data) acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  Note that, regardless of whether the length of the first period and the length of the second period are the same or different from each other, the second period is the same as the time period in which the hall computer 262 is adjacent in time series. By setting the one entrance port passing signal to a distinguishable period, each of the first entrance port passing signals adjacent in time series can be reliably detected (distinguished) by the hall computer 262.

  Further, regardless of whether the length of the first period is the same as the length of the second period, or the length of the second period is different, the hall computer 262 is adjacent to the second period in time series. It is preferable to set a shortest period in which one entrance entrance signal can be distinguished, or a neighboring period longer than the shortest period. By setting at least the second period to be the shortest period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the first entrance port passing signals adjacent in time series, or a neighboring period longer than the shortest period, When there is a 1 entrance entrance signal, the difference between the timing at which the sphere passes through the 1 entrance entrance 64 and the output timing of the 1 entrance entrance signal to be output next while waiting is reduced. can do. Therefore, not only can the hall computer 262 reliably detect (distinguish) each of the first entrance pass signals adjacent in time series, but also after the first entrance pass signal has been output, The period until the start of the output of the ball passage signal can be shortened to the maximum or almost the maximum, and the data acquisition efficiency can be effectively improved.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above are different in the configuration of the game area located in the center of the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIGS. 3 and 15). Accordingly, the contents of the game are different. In the second embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  15 and 16 are front views of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 15 illustrates a case where all of the ten electric components 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a, 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, and 695a are in the closed position. On the other hand, FIG. 16 illustrates a case in which all of the ten electric components 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a, 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, and 695a are in the open position. In FIG. 16, illustration of a ball guiding nail is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment includes a base plate 60, a large number of ball nails (not shown in FIG. 16), windmills and rails 61 and 62, A winning port 601, an upper stage operating port 602, a lower stage operating port 603, and ten winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, 645, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 and the like are assembled. Here, the general winning port 601, the upper operating port 602, the lower operating port 603, and the ten winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, 645, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 are the pachinko machines of the first embodiment. Like the first entrance 64 in the machine 10, it is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a general winning opening 601 is disposed at the upper part of the game area of the game board 13. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is configured such that when a ball wins (wins) in the general winning opening 601, 10 balls are paid out as a winning ball for one win.

  An upper operation opening 602 is disposed below the general winning opening 601 (vertical direction in FIGS. 15 and 16). In the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the fact that the ball has won the upper stage operating port 602 indicates that the upper stage operating port switch provided on the back side of the upper stage operating port 602 in the game board 13 (part of various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17). ), 10 balls are awarded as winning balls per prize, and five electric actors 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a are simultaneously moved from the closed position (FIG. 15) to the open position (FIG. 15). 16).

  Below the upper stage operating port 602, five winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, 645 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIGS. 15 and 16). These winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, 645 are units configured in the same manner. In the following description, the winning unit 641 is representatively described.

  The winning unit 641 is provided at the upper first operating port 651 provided at the top, the upper first winning port 661 provided below the upper first operating port 651, and the entrance of the upper first winning port 661. It is a unit that is configured to include the electric accessory 661a. The electric accessory 661a is driven by the upper first prize opening solenoid 210a (see FIG. 17), and is in the closed position (the state shown in FIG. 15) or the open position opened in the left-right direction from the closed position (see FIG. 16). (Shown state).

  The upper first operation port 651 is configured to be able to enter the ball at all times, and the fact that a ball has won the first operation port 651 is provided on the back side of the upper first operation port 651 in the game board 13. When detected by the first operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17), ten balls are paid out as a winning ball per winning and the electric accessory 661a is moved from the closed position (FIG. 16). It is configured to move to the open position (FIG. 15).

  The upper first winning port 661 has a front surface covered with a cover extending from the front surface of the upper first working port 651, and is configured such that passage of a ball is restricted depending on the position of the electric accessory 661a. . Specifically, when the electric accessory 661a is in the open position (FIG. 16), it is possible to pass a ball (winning) to the upper first winning port 661, but the electric accessory 661a is in the closed position ( In the case of FIG. 15), it is impossible to pass the ball to the upper first winning opening 661. That is, the upper first winning port 661 can pass the ball only when (1) the ball wins the upper stage operating port 602 or (2) the ball wins the upper first operating port 651. .

  The fact that the ball has won the upper first prize opening 661 is confirmed by an upper first prize opening switch (a part of various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17) provided on the back side of the upper first prize opening 661 in the game board 13. When detected, 10 balls are awarded as winning balls per winning and the electric accessory 661a is moved from the open position (FIG. 16) to the closed position (FIG. 15). Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the closed electric combination 661a is opened by the passage of the ball to the upper stage operation port 602 or the upper first operation port 651, and the opened electric combination 661a is The ball is closed again by winning a ball to the first winning port 661.

  As for the winning units 642 to 645, (1) “upper first operating port 651” in the above description for the winning unit 641 is the upper operating port (upper second to upper fifth operating port) corresponding to the winning unit. (2) “Upper first winning port 661” is replaced with upper winning ports (upper second to upper fifth winning ports 662 to 665) corresponding to the winning unit, and (3) “Electric The winning combination 661a ”is read as the electric winning combination (electric winning combination 662a to 665a) corresponding to the winning unit, and (4)“ up first winning opening solenoid 210a ”is replaced with the winning opening solenoid corresponding to the winning unit (upper no. 2 to the upper fifth winning port solenoid 210b to 210e (see FIG. 17)), and (5) “upper first operating port switch” is replaced with the upper operating port switch (upper second to upper fifth switch corresponding to the winning unit). Product (6) "Upper first winning port switch" is replaced with an upper winning port switch (upper second to upper second) corresponding to the winning unit. What is necessary is just to read as 5 winning a prize mouth switch (all are a part of various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17).

  A lower operation port 603 is disposed below the third winning unit 643. In the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, when a ball wins the lower stage operating port 603, 10 balls are paid out as a winning ball per winning, and five electric actors 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, 695a are all at once. It is configured to be moved from the closed position (FIG. 15) to the open position (FIG. 16).

  Below the lower operation port 603, five winning units 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. These winning units 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 are all units configured similarly to the winning unit 641 described above.

  Therefore, for the winning units 671 to 675, (1) “upper first operating port 651” in the above description for the winning unit 641 is the lower operating port (lower first to lower fifth operating port) corresponding to the winning unit. 682-685), (2) “upper first winning port 661” is replaced with lower winning ports (lower first through lower fifth winning ports 691-695) corresponding to the winning unit, and (3) “electrical” "Household 661a" is read as an electric winning combination (electric winning combination 691a to 695a) corresponding to the winning unit, and (4) "Upper first winning opening solenoid 210a" is replaced with a lower winning opening solenoid corresponding to the winning unit (lower The first to lower fifth winning opening solenoids 210f to 210j (see FIG. 17)) are replaced with (5) “upper first operating opening switch” and lower operating opening switches (lower first to lower second opening corresponding to the winning units). (6) “Upper first winning port switch” is replaced with lower winning port switch (lower first to lower) corresponding to the winning unit. What is necessary is just to read as a 5th winning a prize mouth switch (all are a part of various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, all five top winning ports (upper first to fifth fifth winning ports 661 to 665) are in a state where a winning can be achieved by winning a ball to the upper stage operating port 602. An advantageous gaming state occurs. Similarly, when a ball wins the lower stage operating port 603, all five lower winning ports (lower first to lower fifth winning ports 691 to 695) are in a state where they can win, and the most advantageous gaming state is generated. It will be.

  The pachinko machine of the present embodiment outputs a specific operation port passage signal to the hall computer 262 every time a ball wins the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 that can generate the most advantageous gaming state. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, when the hall computer 262 receives the specific operation port passage signal, the hall computer 262 displays the data displayed in the vicinity of the pachinko machine (for example, the upper part of the pachinko machine) over the ON period of the received specific operation port passage signal. A control signal is output to make the device blink.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the output period (ON period) of one specific operating port passage signal is initially set to 30 s. However, although details will be described later, when a winning of a ball to the upper stage operating port 602 or the lower stage operating port 603 is detected at a relatively short interval, an output period of a specific operating port passing signal that is output during or after the output. Is shorter than the initial set value (30 s in this embodiment).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, even when a ball wins the upper stage operating port 602 or the lower stage operating port 603 at relatively short intervals, the winning timing and the output start timing of the specific operating port passing signal (or The reception timing of the specific operation port passage signal in the hall computer 262 can be suppressed from greatly deviating.

  FIG. 17 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. The RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the second embodiment includes an external output buffer 203a, a signal output management counter 203c, a specific operation port passage counter 203d, an upper first winning port opening flag 203e, and an upper second winning port. An open flag 203f, an upper third prize opening open flag 203g, an upper fourth prize opening open flag 203h, an upper fifth prize opening open flag 203i, a lower first prize opening open flag 203j, Lower second winning opening open flag 203k, lower third winning opening open flag 203l, lower fourth winning opening open flag 203m, lower fifth winning opening open flag 203n, and contents of internal register of MPU 201 And a stack area for storing a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like.憶 is the working area and a (working area).

  The specific operation port passage counter 203d is a counter that counts a state in which a ball has passed through the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603, but a specific operation port passage signal corresponding to the passage has not been output. Note that the “specific operation port passage signal” is an ON signal that is output over a predetermined period (in this embodiment, a maximum of 30 seconds) for one pass to the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603. 25).

  The specific operation port passage counter 203d is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on, and then each time a ball enters the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 (that is, the upper operation port switch or the lower operation port switch (various switches) Every time a part of 208 (on) is detected, 1 is added, and every time one specific operation port passage signal is output, 1 is subtracted in external information processing (see FIG. 24) described later.

  Therefore, if the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d is 0, the number of specific operation port passage signals corresponding to the number of times the ball has passed to the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 has already been transmitted to the hall computer 262. Indicates that On the other hand, when the specific operating port passage counter 203d shows a value of 1 or more, the passage of the ball to the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 is detected by the number indicated by the specific operation port passage counter 203d. Regardless, it indicates that there is a specific operation port passage signal that is not output (not transmitted, waiting) to the hall computer 262.

  The upper first winning opening open flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the electric accessory 661a provided at the entrance of the upper first winning opening 661 is open, and the electric accessory 661a is open. Indicates ON in some cases. Similarly, the upper second to fifth fifth winning opening opening flags 203f to 203i are flags indicating whether or not the electric accessories 662a to 665a are open, respectively, and indicate ON if they are open. .

  The lower first prize opening open flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the electric accessory 691a provided at the entrance of the lower first prize opening 691 is open, and the electric accessory 691a is open. Indicates ON in some cases. Similarly, the lower second to lower fifth winning opening open flags 203k to 203n are flags that indicate whether or not the electric accessories 692a to 695a are open, respectively, and indicate ON if they are open. .

  The input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and an upper first for driving to open / close the electric accessory 661a. The winning prize solenoid 210a, the upper second winning prize solenoid 210b for driving to open / close the electric accessory 662a, the upper third winning prize solenoid 210c for opening / closing the electric accessory 663a, and the electric accessory 664a to open / close. The upper fourth winning opening solenoid 210d, the upper fifth winning opening solenoid 210e for opening and closing the electric accessory 665a, the lower first winning opening solenoid 210f for opening and closing the electric accessory 691a, and the electric accessory 692a. Lower second prize opening solenoid 210g for opening / closing driving, lower second for opening / closing driving of electric accessory 693a The winning opening solenoid 210h, the lower fourth winning opening solenoid 210i for driving the electric accessory 694a to open and close, the lower fifth winning opening solenoid 210j for opening and closing the electric accessory 695a, and the external output terminal plate 261 are connected. Yes.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. Note that the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is also similar to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. The main process is roughly divided into a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment at a cycle of 2 ms), and an NMI interrupt process.

  Here, the start-up process and the NMI process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment are the start-up process (see FIG. 7) and the NMI process executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. This is the same processing as that (not shown). The main process executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is the same as that of S202 to S206, S209, and S210 in the main process (see FIG. 8) executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The process is omitted. That is, the main process executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is the process of S207 after the execution of the external output process (S201).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing according to the second embodiment. The timer process of the second embodiment is also executed at predetermined intervals (in this embodiment, every 2 ms) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, similarly to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) of the first embodiment. Is done.

  In the timer interrupt process of the second embodiment, first, a switch read process is executed (S501). In this switch reading process (S501), various switches 208 (for example, upper stage operating port switch, upper first to fifth operating port switch, upper first to fifth winning port switch, lower stage operating port switch, lower first to first operating port switch, 5 operating port switches, lower first to fifth winning port switches, etc.) are read, and the detection information (winning detection information) is acquired by determining the state of the switches.

  Next, a switch monitoring process for performing each setting according to the winning detection information acquired by the switch reading process (S501) is executed (S511), and various signals such as a specific operation port passing signal to be output to the hall computer 262 are set. External information processing (that is, setting of each setting data bit of the external output buffer 203a) is executed (S512), a firing control process is executed (S506), and this timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Here, the switch monitoring process (S511) will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20 are flowcharts showing the switch monitoring process (S511) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the switch monitoring process (S511) of the second embodiment, first, it is determined whether a sphere has passed through an upper stage operating port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the upper stage operating port 602. If it confirms (S2501) and passes (S2501: Yes), the upper stage operation port switch process mentioned later is performed (S2502).

  After the execution of the upper stage operating port switch process (S2502), or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2501, if the ball does not pass through the upper stage operating port switch (S2501: No), it is provided in the upper first operating port 651. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the first operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208) (S2503). As a result of checking in the process of S2503, if the ball passes through the upper first operation port switch (S2503: Yes), an upper first operation port switch process described later is executed (S2504).

  After the execution of the upper first operation port switch process (S2504) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2503, when the ball does not pass through the upper first operation port switch (S2503: No), the upper second operation port switch It is confirmed whether the ball has passed through the upper second operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 652 (S2505). As a result of checking in the process of S2505, if the ball passes through the upper second operation port switch (S2505: Yes), an upper second operation port switch process described later is executed (S2506).

  After the execution of the upper second operation port switch process (S2506) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2505, when the ball does not pass through the upper second operation port switch (S2505: No), the upper third operation port operation It is confirmed whether the ball has passed through the upper third operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 653 (S2507). If the ball passes through the upper third operation port switch as a result of the confirmation in S2507 (S2507: Yes), an upper third operation port switch process described later is executed (S2508).

  After the execution of the upper third operation port switch process (S2508) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2507, if the ball does not pass through the upper third operation port switch (S2507: No), the upper fourth operation port operation It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the upper fourth operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 654 (S2509). As a result of checking in the process of S2509, if the ball passes through the upper fourth operation port switch (S2509: Yes), the upper fourth operation port switch process described later is executed (S2510).

  After the execution of the upper fourth operation port switch process (S2510) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2509, when the ball does not pass through the upper fourth operation port switch (S2509: No), the upper fifth operation port operation It is confirmed whether or not the sphere has passed through the upper fifth operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 655 (S2511). As a result of checking in the process of S2511, if the ball has passed through the upper fifth operation port switch (S2511: Yes), an upper fifth operation port switch process described later is executed (S2512).

  After the execution of the upper fifth operation port switch process (S2512) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2511, if the ball has not passed through the upper fifth operation port switch (S2511: No), the upper first prize It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the upper first prize opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the mouth 661 (S2513). As a result of checking in the process of S2513, if the ball has passed the upper first prize opening switch (S2513: Yes), an upper first prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2514).

  After the execution of the upper first prize opening switch process (S2514) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2513, if the ball has not passed the upper first prize opening switch (S2513: No), the upper second prize winning prize switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the upper second prize opening switch (a part of various switches 208) provided at the mouth 662 (S2515). As a result of checking in the process of S2515, if the ball has passed the upper second prize opening switch (S2515: Yes), an upper second prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2516).

  After the execution of the upper second prize opening switch process (S2516) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2515, when the ball has not passed the upper second prize opening switch (S2515: No), the upper third prize winning prize switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the upper third prize opening switch (a part of various switches 208) provided at the mouth 663 (S2517). As a result of checking in the process of S2517, if the ball has passed the upper third prize opening switch (S2517: Yes), an upper third prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2518).

  After the execution of the upper third prize opening switch process (S2518) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2517, if the ball has not passed the upper third prize opening switch (S2517: No), the upper fourth prize winning prize switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the upper fourth prize opening switch (a part of various switches 208) provided at the mouth 664 (S2519). As a result of checking in the process of S2519, if the ball has passed the upper fourth prize opening switch (S2519: Yes), an upper fourth prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2520).

  After the execution of the upper fourth winning opening switch process (S2520) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2519, if the ball has not passed through the upper fourth winning opening switch (S2519: No), the upper fifth winning prize switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the upper fifth prize opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the mouth 665 (S2521). As a result of checking in the processing of S2521, if the ball has passed the upper fifth winning opening switch (S2521: Yes), the upper fifth winning opening switch processing described later is executed (S2522).

  After the execution of the upper fifth winning opening switch process (S2522) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2521, if the ball has not passed through the upper fifth winning opening switch (S2521: No), the process of S2523 ( (See FIG. 20).

  As shown in FIG. 20, in S2523, it is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower-stage operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided in the lower-stage operating port 603 (S2523). As a result of checking in the process of S2523, if the ball passes through the lower-stage operating port switch (S2523: Yes), the lower-stage operating port switch process described later is executed (S2524).

  After the execution of the lower operation port switch process (S2524) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2523, when the ball does not pass through the lower operation port switch (S2523: No), it is provided in the lower first operation port 681. It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed the lower first operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) (S2525). If the ball passes through the lower first operation port switch as a result of the confirmation in S2525 (S2525: Yes), the lower first operation port switch process described later is executed (S2526).

  After the execution of the lower first operation port switch process (S2526) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2525, when the ball does not pass through the lower first operation port switch (S2525: No), the lower second operation port switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower second operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 682 (S2527). If the ball passes through the lower second operation port switch as a result of the confirmation in S2527 (S2527: Yes), the lower second operation port switch process described later is executed (S2528).

  After the execution of the lower second operation port switch process (S2528) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2527, when the ball does not pass through the lower second operation port switch (S2527: No), the lower third operation port operation It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower third operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 683 (S2529). If the ball passes through the lower third operation port switch as a result of the confirmation in S2529 (S2529: Yes), the lower third operation port switch process described later is executed (S2530).

  After the execution of the lower third operating port switch process (S2530) or as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2529, if the ball does not pass through the lower third operating port switch (S2529: No), the lower fourth operating port switch process It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower fourth operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 684 (S2531). As a result of checking in the process of S2531, if the ball passes through the lower fourth operating port switch (S2531: Yes), the lower fourth operating port switch process described later is executed (S2532).

  After the execution of the lower fourth operation port switch process (S2532) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2531, if the ball does not pass through the lower fourth operation port switch (S2531: No), the lower fifth operation port operation It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower fifth operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 685 (S2533). As a result of checking in the process of S2533, if the ball has passed through the lower fifth operation port switch (S2533: Yes), the lower fifth operation port switch process described later is executed (S2534).

  After the execution of the lower fifth operating port switch process (S2534) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2533, if the ball does not pass through the lower fifth operating port switch (S2533: No), the lower first winning prize It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower first prize opening switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the mouth 691 (S2535). If the ball passes through the lower first prize opening switch as a result of the confirmation in S2535 (S2535: Yes), the lower first prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2536).

  After the execution of the lower first prize opening switch process (S2536) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2535, if the ball does not pass through the lower first prize opening switch (S2535: No), the lower second prize winning prize switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower second prize opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the mouth 692 (S2537). As a result of checking in the processing of S2537, if the ball has passed the lower second prize opening switch (S2537: Yes), lower second prize opening switch processing described later is executed (S2538).

  After the execution of the lower second prize opening switch process (S2538) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2537, if the ball has not passed the lower second prize opening switch (S2537: No), the lower third prize winning prize switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower third prize opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided in the mouth 693 (S2539). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2539, if the ball has passed the lower third prize opening switch (S2539: Yes), the lower third prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2540).

  After the execution of the lower third prize opening switch process (S2540) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2539, if the ball has not passed the lower third prize opening switch (S2539: No), the lower fourth prize winning switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed the lower fourth prize opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided in the mouth 694 (S2541). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2541, if the ball has passed the lower fourth prize opening switch (S2541: Yes), the lower fourth prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2542).

  After the execution of the lower fourth prize opening switch process (S2542) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2541, if the ball does not pass through the lower fourth prize opening switch (S2541: No), the lower fifth prize winning switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed the lower fifth prize opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the mouth 695 (S2543). As a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2543, if the ball has passed through the lower fifth winning opening switch (S2543: Yes), lower fifth winning opening switch processing described later is executed (S2544).

  After the execution of the lower fifth prize opening switch process (S2544) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2543, when the ball has not passed the lower fifth prize opening switch (S2543: No), the general prize opening 601 A process (other switch process) according to the detection of the sphere by other switches such as a switch (not shown) for detecting the passage of the sphere to (S2545) is executed, and the switch monitoring process (S511) is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 21A, the above-described upper operation port switch process (S2502) will be described. FIG. 21A is a flowchart showing the upper stage operation port switch process (S2502) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in this upper stage operation port switch process (S2502), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2601). The prize ball counter is a counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, and counts the number of times (winning number) that a prize ball should be obtained. The prize ball counter is configured to be cleared to 0 when the power is turned on and the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 111 is set.

  After the processing of S2601, 1 is added to the specific operating port passage counter 203d (S2602), the upper first to upper fifth winning port solenoids 210a to 210e are turned on (S2603), and the upper first to upper fifth winning ports are being opened. The flags 203e to 203i are turned on (S2604), and the upper operation port switch process (S2502) is terminated.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the upper stage operating port 602, the processing of S2603 is executed, and as a result, the electric accessories 661a to 665a associated with the upper first to upper fifth winning ports 661 to 665 are all at once. Released.

  In addition, with reference to FIG. 21 (b), the above-described lower operation port switch process (S2524) will be described. FIG. 21B is a flowchart showing the lower operation port switch process (S2524) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 21 (b), in this lower stage operation port switch process (S2524), first, 1 is added to the prize ball counter (not shown) (S2611), and 1 is added to the specific operation port passage counter 203d. (S2612).

  After the processing of S2612, the lower first to lower fifth winning opening solenoids 210f to 210j are turned on (S2613), and the lower first to lower fifth winning opening opening flags 203j to 203n are turned on (S2614). The mouth switch process (S2524) is terminated.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the lower stage operating port 603, the processing of S2613 is executed, and as a result, the electric accessories 691a to 695a associated with the lower first to lower fifth winning ports 691 to 695 are all at once. Released.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22A, the above-described first working port switch process (S2504) will be described. FIG. 22A is a flowchart showing the upper first operation port switch process (S2504) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 22 (a), in the upper first operation port switch process (S2504), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2621), and the upper first prize port open flag is displayed. It is confirmed whether 203e is off (S2622).

  As a result of checking in the processing of S2622, if the upper first winning opening open flag 203e is OFF (S2622: Yes), the electric accessory 661a associated with the upper first winning opening 661 is in the closed position, so that it is in the open position. The upper first winning opening solenoid 210a is turned on (S2623), the upper first winning opening release flag 203e is turned on (S2624), and the upper first operation opening switch process (S2504) is ended.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the processing of S2622, if the upper first prize opening open flag 203e is on (S2622: No), the electric accessory 661a associated with the upper first prize opening 661 is already in the open position. Therefore, the first operation port switch process (S2504) is terminated without performing the processes of S2623 and S2624.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the upper first operation port 651, the processing of S2623 is executed, and as a result, only the electric accessory 661a associated with the upper first winning port 661 is opened.

  The upper second working port switch process (S2506), the upper third working port switch process (S2508), the upper fourth working port switch process (S2510), and the upper fifth working port switch process (S2512) are also described above. The same process as the upper first operation port switch process (S2504) is performed. That is, in the upper first operating port switch process (S2504), the “upper first winning port solenoid 210a” is a winning port solenoid (upper second to upper fifth winning ports corresponding to the operating port switch that detected the passage of the ball. Solenoids 210b to 210e), “Upper first winning opening open flag 203e” is replaced with a winning opening open flag (upper second to upper fifth winning opening opened) corresponding to the operation port switch that detected the passage of the ball. The flag 203f to 203i) may be read.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the upper second operation port 652, only the electric accessory 662a associated with the upper second game port 662 is released as a result of the upper second operation port switch process (S2506). Similarly, when a ball is won in the upper third operating port 653, only the electric accessory 663a associated with the upper third winning port 663 is opened as a result of the upper third operating port switch process (S2508). . Further, when a ball wins the upper fourth operating port 654, only the electric accessory 664a associated with the upper fourth winning port 664 is opened as a result of the upper fourth operating port switch process (S2510), and the upper When a ball is won at the fifth operating port 655, only the electric accessory 665a associated with the upper fifth winning port 665 is opened as a result of the upper fifth operating port switch process (S2512).

  In addition, with reference to FIG. 22B, the lower first operation port switch process (S2526) will be described. FIG. 22B is a flowchart showing the lower first operation port switch process (S2526) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 22 (b), in the lower first operation port switch process (S2526), first, 1 is added to the prize ball counter (not shown) (S2631), and the lower first prize opening opening flag is set. It is checked whether 203j is off (S2632).

  As a result of checking in the processing of S2632, if the lower first winning opening open flag 203j is OFF (S2632: Yes), the electric accessory 691a associated with the lower first winning opening 691 is in the closed position, so the open position The lower first prize opening solenoid 210f is turned on (S2633), the lower first prize opening open flag 203j is turned on (S2634), and the lower first operation opening switch process (S2526) is terminated.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2632, if the lower first prize opening open flag 203j is on (S2632: No), the electric accessory 691a associated with the lower first prize opening 691 is already in the open position. Therefore, the lower first operation port switch process (S2526) is terminated without performing the processes of S2633 and S2634.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the lower first operation opening 681, the process of S2633 is executed, and as a result, only the electric accessory 691a associated with the lower first winning opening 691 is opened.

  The lower second working port switch process (S2528), the lower third working port switch process (S2530), the lower fourth working port switch process (S2532), and the lower fifth working port switch process (S2534) are also described above. The same processing as the lower first operation port switch processing (S2526) is performed. That is, in the lower first operating port switch process (S2526), the “lower first winning port solenoid 210f” is the winning port solenoid (lower second to lower fifth winning ports corresponding to the operating port switch that detected the passage of the ball). Solenoids 210g to 210j), “lower first winning opening open flag 203j” is replaced with a winning opening open flag (lower second to lower fifth winning opening opened) corresponding to the operation port switch that detected the passage of the ball. Flag 203k to 203n).

  Therefore, when a ball is won in the lower second operating port 682, only the electric accessory 692a associated with the lower second winning port 692 is opened as a result of the lower second operating port switch process (S2528). Similarly, when a ball is won at the lower third operating port 683, only the electric accessory 693a associated with the lower third winning port 693 is opened as a result of the lower third operating port switch process (S2530). . When a ball wins the lower fourth operating port 684, only the electric accessory 694a associated with the lower fourth winning port 694 is opened as a result of the lower fourth operating port switch process (S2532). When a ball is won at the fifth operating port 685, only the electric accessory 695a associated with the lower fifth winning port 695 is opened as a result of the lower fifth operating port switch process (S2534).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23A, the above-described first first prize opening switch process (S2514) will be described. FIG. 23A is a flowchart showing the upper first winning opening switch process (S2514) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 23 (a), in the upper first prize opening switch process (S2514), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2641), and the upper first prize opening solenoid 210a is turned on. Turn off (S2642). After the process of S2642, the upper first prize opening open flag 203e is turned off (S2642), and the upper first prize opening switch process (S2514) is ended.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the upper first winning opening 661, the processing of S2642 is executed, and as a result, the opened electric accessory 661a of the upper first winning opening 661 is closed. .

  In addition, the upper second prize port switch process (S2516), the upper third prize port switch process (S2518), the upper fourth prize port switch process (S2520), and the upper fifth prize port switch process (S2522) are also described above. The same process as the upper first prize opening switch process (S2514) is performed. That is, the “upper first prize opening solenoid 210a” in the upper first prize opening switch process (S2514) is the prize opening solenoid (upper second to upper fifth prize opening corresponding to the prize opening switch that detected the passage of the ball. Solenoids 210b to 210e), “Upper first winning opening open flag 203e” is replaced with a winning opening open flag (upper second to upper fifth winning opening opened) corresponding to the winning opening switch that detected the passage of the ball. The flag 203f to 203i) may be read.

  Therefore, when a ball is won at the upper second winning opening 662, as a result of the upper second winning opening switch process (S2516), the opened electric accessory 662a of the upper second winning opening 662 is closed. . Similarly, when a ball is won at the upper third winning opening 663, the opened electric combination 663a of the upper third winning opening 663 is closed as a result of the upper third winning opening switch process (S2518). The Further, when the ball has won the upper fourth winning opening 664, as a result of the upper fourth winning opening switch process (S2520), the opened electric accessory 664a of the upper fourth winning opening 664 is closed, When the ball has won the upper fifth winning opening 665, as a result of the upper fifth winning opening switch process (S2522), the opened electric accessory 665a of the upper fifth winning opening 665 is closed. Become.

  In addition, with reference to FIG. 23B, the above-described lower first prize opening switch process (S2536) will be described. FIG. 23B is a flowchart showing the lower first prize port switch process (S2536) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 23 (b), in the lower first prize opening switch process (S2536), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2651), and the lower first prize opening solenoid 210f is changed. Turn off (S2652). After the process of S2652, the lower first prize opening open flag 203j is turned off (S2642), and the lower first prize opening switch process (S2536) is ended.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the lower first prize opening 691, the process of S2652 is executed, and as a result, the opened electric accessory 691a of the lower first prize opening 691 is closed. .

  The lower second prize opening switch process (S2538), the lower third prize opening switch process (S2540), the lower fourth prize opening switch process (S2542), and the lower fifth prize opening switch process (S2544) are also described above. The same processing as the lower first prize opening switch processing (S2536) is performed. That is, in the lower first prize opening switch process (S2536), the “lower first prize opening solenoid 210f” is set to a prize opening solenoid (lower second to lower fifth prize opening corresponding to the prize opening switch that detected the passage of the ball. Solenoid 210g-210j), “lower first winning opening open flag 203j” is replaced with a winning opening open flag (lower second to lower fifth winning opening opened) corresponding to the winning opening switch that detected the passage of the ball. Flag 203k to 203n).

  Therefore, when a ball is won at the lower second winning opening 692, as a result of the lower second winning opening switch process (S2538), the opened electric accessory 692a of the lower second winning opening 692 is closed. . Similarly, when a ball is won at the lower third winning opening 693, the open third and lower winning opening 693 is closed as a result of the lower third winning opening switch process (S2540). The Further, when the ball has won the lower fourth prize opening 694, as a result of the lower fourth prize opening switch process (S2542), the opened electric accessory 694a of the lower fourth prize opening 694 is closed, When a ball is won at the lower fifth winning opening 695, the opened electric accessory 695a of the lower fifth winning opening 695 is closed as a result of the lower fifth winning opening switch process (S2544). Become.

  Next, the external information processing (S512) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the external information processing (S512) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the external information processing (S512) of the second embodiment, first, as in the process of S501 of the external information processing (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment, the external output buffer 203a is set to 0. A process of clearing is executed (S1521).

  After the process of S1521, it is confirmed whether the value of the specific operating port passage counter 203d is 0 (S1522). When the value of the specific operating port passage counter 203d is not 0, that is, when a value larger than 0 is confirmed (S1522: No) as a result of checking in the processing of S1522, whichever of the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 is Although there is a specific operation port passage signal that is not output (not transmitted, in standby) to the hall computer 262 even though the passage of the ball to is detected, in this case, the value of the signal output management counter 203c Is confirmed to be 0 (S1523).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 as a result of checking in the processing of S1523 (S1523: Yes), there is no specific operating port passing signal being managed (timed) by the signal output management counter 203c. Then, 15250 is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c (S1529), and time measurement (measurement) by the signal output management counter 203c is started.

  Here, since the value of the signal output management counter 203c is decremented (counted down) by 1 every 2 ms which is the execution interval of the external information processing (S512), the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1529 The value corresponds to a period of 30.5 s (30500 ms).

  Note that, as a result of the processing of S1529, the initial value corresponding to the period of 30.5 s set in the signal output management counter 203c is the first output period that is the initial setting with respect to one specific operation inlet incoming signal. This is a value corresponding to the total period of the period (30 s) and the second period (0.5 s) set in advance as an off period after the end of the output of the specific operation port passage signal.

  In the present embodiment, during the second period, which is the off period after the output of the specific operation port passage signal is finished, the player blinks the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal. The time period is set to 0.5 s so as to be an off period that can be visually distinguished in units of specific operation port passing signals adjacent in time series.

  Further, the hall computer 262 of the present embodiment is configured to output a control signal so as to blink the data display set around the pachinko machine over the reception period of the specific operation port passage signal (ON signal). ing. That is, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal from the main controller 110 corresponds to the blinking period of the data display. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the initial output period (first period) of the specific operation port passage signal to 30 s, data for one winning of the ball to the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 is obtained. The indicator will flash for a maximum of 30 seconds, which is the first period.

  After the processing of S1529, 1 is subtracted from the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d (S1530), and then 1 is set to the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passage signal in the external output buffer 203a (S1531).

  As a result of the processing of S1531, the external output processing (S201) in the main processing (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is performed with the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passing signal in the external output buffer 203a being set to 1. When executed, a specific operation port passage signal which is an ON signal is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261.

  Therefore, when the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d is not 0 and the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0, it is the output timing of the specific operation port passage signal that has not been output or is waiting, A period of 30.5 s is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c in the process of S1529, and the output of the specific operation port passage signal is started.

  After the processing of S1531, other setting processing (S1528) is executed, and this external information processing (S512) is terminated. In the other setting process (S1528), setting data bits corresponding to signals other than the specific operation port passage signal in the external output buffer 203a (for example, a signal indicating that a special gaming state is being performed) are updated. After the other setting process (S1528) is executed, the external information processing (S512) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is not 0, that is, if a value greater than 0 is confirmed as a result of the confirmation in S1523 (S1523: No), it is not output to the hall computer 262 (not transmitted, This indicates that the specific output port passing signal is being managed by the signal output management counter 203c under a situation where there is a specific operating port pass signal (waiting). In such a case, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the signal output management counter 203c (S1524), and it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is greater than 15000 (S1525).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 15000 as a result of the confirmation in S1525 (S1525: Yes), after the initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c in S1529, that is, the specific operation port passage signal Since the period of 0.5 s has not yet elapsed after the start of the output, the process proceeds to S1531, and the output of the specific operation port passage signal is continued (S1531).

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 15000 or less as a result of checking in the processing of S1525 (S1525: No), the period of 0.5 s has elapsed since the output of the specific operation port passage signal was started. Then, it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 (S1526).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 250 or more as a result of checking in the processing of S1526 (S1526: No), in this case, there is a specific operating port passage signal that is not output to the hall computer 262. This indicates that the specific operation port passage signal is being output and that at least 0.5 s has elapsed since the start of output. In such a case, 250 is reset in the signal output management counter 203c (S1527), and the flow proceeds to other setting processing (S1528).

  In this case (that is, when 250 is reset in the signal output management counter 203c by the process of S1527), the process of S1531 is not executed, so that the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passage signal is 0 ( Off). As a result, when the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is executed, the signal in the OFF state is not the specific operation port passage signal (ON signal) but the external output terminal plate 261. To the hall computer 262.

  Therefore, when there is a specific operation port passage signal being output and there is a non-output specific operation port passage signal, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal being output is preset as the third period. If it is 0.5 s or more, regardless of the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing in S1529, the specific operation is performed after 250 is reset in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing in S1527. The output of the mouth passing signal is interrupted.

  In the present embodiment, in the third period, the player visually distinguishes the blinking of the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal in units of the specific operation port passage signal. The period is set to 0.5 s to obtain a period to obtain.

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 as a result of checking in the processing of S1526 (S1526: Yes), the second period (0.5 s) after the output of the specific operation port passage signal is completed. Therefore, while the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passage signal is kept 0 (off), the flow proceeds to other setting processing (S1528).

  Here, as described above, when 250 is reset in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1527, in the external information processing (S512) executed at the next timing (that is, after 2 ms), the signal output management is performed. Since the value of the counter 203c is 249, the determination process in S1526 proceeds to the No side. That is, after 250 is reset in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1527 and the output of the specific operation port passage signal is interrupted, 0.5 s is set as the off period after the output of the specific operation port passage signal ends. It will be timed.

  If the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d is 0 (S1522: Yes) as a result of confirmation in S1522, it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1532).

  When the value of the signal output management counter 203c is not 0 as a result of checking in the process of S1532, that is, when a value greater than 0 is confirmed (S1532: No), it is not output to the hall computer 262 (not transmitted, waiting) ) Indicates that the specific operation port passage signal is being managed by the signal output management counter 203c under the condition where there is no specific operation port passage signal. In such a case, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the signal output management counter 203c (S1533), and it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 (S1534).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 250 or more as a result of checking in the processing of S1534 (S1534: No), in such a case, there is no specific operating port passing signal that is not output to the hall computer 262. Since the specific operating port passage signal is being output, the process proceeds to S1531. As a result, the output of the specific operation port passage signal is continued.

  On the other hand, when the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 as a result of checking in the processing of S1534 (S1531: Yes), the second period (0.5 s) after the end of the output of the specific operating port passage signal is completed. Since the time is being measured, the process proceeds to another setting process (S1528) while the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passage signal is kept 0 (off).

  Therefore, when there is no specific operation port passing signal that has not been output to the hall computer 262, a first period (30 s) that is an initial setting output period for one specific operation port entering ball passing signal; Management of both the second period (0.5 s), which is the off period after the end of output of the specific operation port passage signal, is achieved by setting the initial value to the signal output management counter 203c once in the process of S1529. It can be done.

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1532: Yes), there is no specific operation port passing signal to be output nor a specific operation port passing signal to be managed for a period, so other setting processing ( The process proceeds to S1508).

  Thus, according to the external information processing (S512) executed by the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, the specific operation port passage signal is output in a situation where there is an unoutput specific operation port passage signal. In this case, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal is secured at least for a period (0.5 s in the present embodiment) set in advance as the third period, and the entire output period is set to the initial set value (this In the embodiment, adjustment is made to be shorter than 30 s). That is, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal is adjusted to a period that is equal to or more than a preset third period and less than the initial set value (first period) of the output period.

  In the situation where there is a non-output specific operating port passage signal, the specific operation port passing signal is output as follows: (1) The specific operation in the situation where no non-output specific operation port passage signal remains When a non-output specific operation port passage signal is generated during the output of the mouth passage signal, or (2) even if the output of the specific operation port passage signal is newly started, the non-output specific operation port passage signal Is assumed to remain.

  Here, in the case of the above (1), from the start of the output of the specific operating port passage signal until the generation of the non-output specific operating port passage signal, (external information processing (S512)) ( The processing is executed in the order of S1522: Yes) → (S1532: No) → S1533 → (S1534: No) → S1531, but due to the occurrence of a non-output specific operating port passage signal (S1522: No) → (S1532: No) → After the processing is executed in the order of S1524, the confirmation processing of S1525 is executed.

  At this time, if the specific operation port passage signal being output has already been output for the third period (0.5 s in the present embodiment), the branch process of No in S1525 is executed. The output of the specific operation port passage signal is terminated without waiting for the elapse of the initial setting output period (first period, 30 s in the present embodiment), and the off period (second period, 0 in the present embodiment). .5s), the value of the signal output management counter 203c is reset by the processing of S1527.

  On the other hand, if the output period of the specific operation port passage signal being output has not yet reached the third period (0.5 s in the present embodiment), the Yes branch process in S1525 is executed. As a result, at least the third period is secured as the output period of the specific operation port passage signal.

  In the case of (2) above, after the output of the specific operation port passage signal is started, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal being output is the third period (0.5 s in this embodiment). Since the branching process of Yes in S1525 is executed until it reaches, as a result, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal is only the third period (0.5 s in this embodiment).

  Next, referring to FIG. 25, the specific operation port passage signal output from the pachinko machine of the second embodiment to the hall computer 262 (the output state of the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is 1). The output timing will be described. FIG. 25 is a timing chart illustrating the output timing of the specific operation port passage signal in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

  In FIG. 25 (a), the passage interval of the sphere to the upper stage operating port 602 or the lower stage operating port 603 is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c by the process of S1529 in the above-described external information processing (see FIG. 24). It is a timing chart which illustrated the case where it is more than the last period (30.5s).

  As shown in FIG. 25 (a), a detection signal sg11 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the upper stage operating port 602 is output from the upper stage operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208). When the passage of the ball to the operation port 602 is detected by the upper operation port switch, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the 1 detection signal sg11 (ie, one win) The output of the one specific operation port passage signal ON11 to is started.

  In starting the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON11, the processing of S1529 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24) is executed, and an initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c. The initial value set at this time is set in advance as a first period (30 s), which is an initial setting output period for one specific operation port incoming ball passing signal, and an off period after the output of the specific operation port passing signal ends. The value is equivalent to the sum period with the second period (0.5 s).

  During the time counting by the signal output management counter 203c, the passage of the sphere to the upper stage operating port 602 or the lower stage operating port 603 is not detected, and the specific passing port is determined by the determination processing in S1534 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24). When it is determined that the output period of the passing signal has passed the initial setting period (30 s in this embodiment), the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is returned from 1 to 0, thereby passing the specific operation port. The output of the signal ON11 is finished.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, a value corresponding to 30.5 s, which is the sum of the output period (30 s) of the initial setting for the specific operation port passage signal ON11 and the off period OF11, is obtained by the process of S1529. Since the signal output management counter 203c is set as an initial value, the value of the signal output management counter 203c does not reach 0 even when the signal output management counter 203c measures the output period of 30 s. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the signal output management counter 203c does not set an initial value for measuring the off period OF11 even after the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON11 is completed. The off period OF11 (in this embodiment, 0.5 s) can be continuously counted.

  The detection signal sg12 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the lower operation port 602 is not managed by the signal output management counter 203c with respect to the detection signal sg11. ), The process of S1529 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24) is executed in the same manner as when the detection signal sg11 is output, and 30.5 s is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c. Is set. As a result, similarly to the period management for the detection signal sg11, even after the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON12 is completed, the initial value for measuring the off period OF12 is not set in the signal output management counter 203c. The off period OF12 can be timed subsequently.

  FIG. 25B is a timing chart exemplifying a case where a non-output specific operating port passage signal is generated during the output of the specific operating port passage signal in a situation where no non-output specific operation port passage signal remains. .

  As shown in FIG. 25B, when a detection signal sg21 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the upper stage operating port 602 is output from the upper stage operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208), an external output The corresponding setting data bit in the buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the output of one specific operating port passage signal ON21 for one detection signal sg21 is started.

  On the other hand, the detection signal sg22 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the lower operation port 603 is output to the lower operation port before the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON21 reaches 30s, which is the default output period. When output from a switch (a part of various switches 208), the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a, even before the initial output period is reached, according to the output timing of the detection signal sg22 Is returned from 1 to 0, and the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON21 is terminated.

  That is, in such a case, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON21 is secured at least for the output period (third period) of 0.5 s by the determination process of S1525 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24). By the determination processing in S1526, the period is adjusted (shortened) to a period of less than 30 s, which is the default output period (first period).

  After the end of the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON21, after waiting for the passage of the OFF period OF22 of 0.5 s, the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON22 with respect to the detection signal sg22 output during the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON21 Is started (that is, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1).

  Here, the detection signal sg23 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the upper stage operating port 602 before the output period of the specific operating port passing signal ON22 reaches 30s which is the default output period is the upper stage operating port. When output from the switch (a part of the various switches 208), the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON22 is set to 0.5s as in the adjustment of the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON22 described above. The output period is adjusted to less than 30 s while ensuring.

  Then, after the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON22 is completed and the 0.5 second off period OF22 has elapsed, the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON23 with respect to the detection signal sg23 is started. At this time, if the passage of a new ball to the upper stage operating port 602 or the lower stage operating port 603 is not detected, the specific operating port passing signal ON23 is turned off after the elapse of the output period of 30 s.

  According to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, if a non-output specific operation port passage signal is generated during the output of the specific operation port passage signal in a situation where an unoutput specific operation port passage signal does not remain, As in the case of the operation port passage signals ON21 and ON22, the output period is shortened from the initial set value of 30 s.

  Therefore, even if a non-output specific operation port passage signal is generated during the output of the specific operation port passage signal in a situation where no non-output specific operation port passage signal remains, the detection signal and the specific operation for the detection signal The time difference from the output timing of the mouth passage signal can be minimized.

  In addition, as described above, the off period is set as the second period in advance even though the time difference between the detection signal and the output timing of the specific operation port passage signal with respect to the detection signal is minimized. .5s is secured, the player can visually blink the data indicator controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal in units of the specific operation port passage signal adjacent in time series. Can be distinguished.

  FIG. 25C is a timing chart illustrating a case where a specific operation port passage signal that has not been output still remains even when the output of the specific operation port passage signal is newly started.

  As shown in FIG. 25C, when a detection signal sg31 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the upper stage operating port 602 is output from the upper stage operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208), an external output The corresponding setting data bit in the buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the output of one specific operation port passage signal ON31 for one detection signal sg31 is started.

  Here, the detection signal sg32 (ON signal) indicating that the sphere has passed through the upper operation port 602 is again operated in the upper stage before the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON31 reaches 30s, which is the default output period. When output from the mouth switch, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON31 is ensured to be an output period (third period) of at least 0.5 s according to the output timing of the detection signal sg32, and the initial setting is performed. The output period (first period) is adjusted (shortened) to a period of less than 30 s.

  The output of the specific operation port passage signal ON32 with respect to the detection signal sg32 is started after an elapse of an OFF period OF31 of 0.5 s from the end of the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON31.

  At this time, a detection signal sg33 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the lower stage operating port 603 was output from the lower stage operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208) during the OFF period OF31 of 0.5 s. In this case, even after the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON32 with respect to the detection signal sg32, the specific operation port passage signal ON33 with respect to the detection signal sg33 remains on standby.

  In the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, in this situation, the branch operation of Yes in S1525 of the external information processing (see FIG. 24) is executed, so that the specific operation port passage signal ON32 is output for 0.5 s. Thereafter, the No branch process in S1526 is executed, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is returned from 1 to 0, and the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON32 is ended.

  Then, after the end of the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON32, the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON33 with respect to the detection signal sg33 is started after the elapse of the off period OF32 of 0.5 s. If the passage of a new ball to the upper stage operating port 602 or the lower stage operating port 603 is not detected after the output of the specific operating port passing signal ON33 is started, the specific operating port passing signal ON33 is turned off after the elapse of the output period of 30 s. The

  According to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, even when the output of the specific operation port passage signal is newly started, when the specific operation port passage signal that has not been output still remains, as in the case of the specific operation port passage signal ON32 The output period is shortened to 0.5 s preset as the third period. Therefore, the waiting period of the specific operation port passage signal ON33 with respect to the detection signal sg33 can be minimized.

  Therefore, even if the output of the specific operation port passage signal is newly started, even if a specific operation port passage signal that has not been output still remains, the detection signal and the specific operation port passage signal corresponding to the detection signal The time difference from the output timing can be minimized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the third period visually distinguishes the flashing of the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal in units of the specific operation port passage signal. Since it is set to 0.5 s, the player can visually blink the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal in units of the specific operation port passage signal. Can be distinguished.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, when the specific operation port passage signal is output, the signal output management counter 203c, which is one counter, has an initial output period (first output). And a second period set in advance as an off period after the output of the specific operating port passage signal is completed is set as an initial value. For this reason, even after the output of the initial setting for the specific operation port passage signal has passed and the output of such a signal is terminated, the off period is continued without setting an initial value for counting the subsequent off period. Can be timed.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when there is no specific operation port passing signal that is not output to the hall computer 262, the initial output period for one specific operation port entering signal is passed. Management of both a certain first period and a second period that is an off period after the output of the specific operation port passage signal is completed is performed at the start timing of the second period by only one signal output management counter 203c. This can be achieved without having to set an initial value. Therefore, the control load applied to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the second period, which is the off period after the end of the output of the specific operation port passage signal, is the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal by the player. The blinking is set to be an off period that can be visually distinguished in units of specific operation port passing signals that are adjacent in time series. In the second period, the hall computer 262 is specified to be adjacent in time series. Any period that can distinguish the operation port passage signal (for example, a period of 52 ms as in the first embodiment) may be used. By setting the second period managed by the signal output management counter 203c to be a period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the specific operation port passing signals that are adjacent in time series, the hall computer 262 is adjacent in time series. It is possible to reliably detect the specific operation port passing signal.

  Similarly, in the present embodiment, in the third period, the player visually blinks the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal in units of the specific operation port passage signal. However, the third period may be a period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the specific operation port passage signal (for example, a period of 52 ms as in the first embodiment). That's fine. By setting the third period managed by the signal output management counter 203c to be a period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish between the specific operation port passing signals adjacent in time series, the hall computer 262 has one specific operation port. Each passing signal can be reliably detected.

  In the present embodiment, the hall computer 262 uses the specific operation port passage signal output from the external output terminal plate 261, and the data display device is used during the output period of the specific operation port passage signal (that is, during the ON period). By blinking and turning off the data display during the off period, a display substantially corresponding to the hit state of the pachinko machine can be performed. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, it is possible to cope with a state (for example, a hit state) generated in the pachinko machine without providing a counter for counting the period during which the data display is blinked or performing control for timing the period. The number of occurrences of the state (for example, the number of winnings that generate the winning state) can be grasped while performing the display.

  The present invention has been described based on one embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the initial state of the output state of the signal output from the main controller 110 is set to 0 (off), and the first entrance port passing signal and the specific operation port passing signal are inverted from the initial state. 1 (on) is maintained over the output period. However, when the initial state of the output state is 1, the first entrance is obtained by maintaining the inverted 0 of the initial state over the output period. It is good also as a passage signal and a specific operation port passage signal.

  In each of the above embodiments, when outputting the first entrance opening passage signal and the specific operation opening passage signal, the initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c, and the value of the signal output management counter 203c is subtracted. In this way, the first period and the second period are timed (managed). However, by adding the signal output management counter 203c from 0, both the first period and the second period are set. You may comprise so that it may time. Specifically, with the start of the output of the first entrance port passage signal and the specific operation port passage signal, the signal output management counter 203c starts timing from 0 and monitors whether or not the first period has been reached. If it is determined that the first period has been reached, the signal may be turned off, and further, it may be configured to monitor whether the sum period of the first period and the second period has been reached.

  Moreover, in each said embodiment, although the 1st entrance opening passage signal and the specific operation opening passage signal were illustrated as a signal which should be managed, this invention is applicable with respect to various signals. In addition, like the first entrance opening passage signal and the specific operation opening passage signal, the passage opening that creates (or has the possibility of) a state more advantageous to the player than the normal state is triggered by the passage of the ball. When applied to a signal output triggered by the passage of a ball, the number of times the ball has passed to a passage that creates (or has the possibility of) an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state 262 can be surely grasped, and such data can be used by the hall manager for purposes such as nail adjustment and fraud monitoring.

  In addition, when the variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, a signal is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262, and this signal is adopted as a signal to be managed. May be. When the signal indicating the start of the fluctuation display is adopted as a signal to be managed, for example, every time the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 10) is executed, the signal is displayed in the same manner as the external information processing (see FIG. 13). What is necessary is just to comprise so that an output process may be performed. Alternatively, every time the variation start process (see FIG. 10) is executed, the value of the first entrance opening passage counter 203b is subtracted, and when the value of the first entrance entrance passage counter 203b is subtracted, the external information You may comprise so that the signal output process similar to a process (refer FIG. 13) may be performed.

  Moreover, in each said embodiment, it is the management apparatus installed in the exterior of the pachinko machine (pachinko machine 10) from the main control apparatus 110, such as a 1st entrance opening passage signal and a specific operation port passage signal. Although the case of outputting to the hall computer 262 has been illustrated, the present invention can also be applied to output of signals from the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 to the hall computer 262. The present invention can also be applied to output of signals inside the pachinko machine, such as output of signals from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the ten electric components 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a, 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, 695a are configured to be driven by the corresponding winning solenoids 210a to 210j. However, instead of the electric accessory, an accessory that operates by a mechanical link mechanism may be arranged.

  For example, when a ball is won in the upper stage operation port 602, the mechanical objects disposed at the entrances of the upper first to upper fifth winning ports 661 to 665 are all opened at the same time by the mechanical link mechanism. When a ball is won in the first to upper fifth operation ports 651 to 655, it is arranged at the entrance of the corresponding upper winning port (upper first to fifth fifth winning ports 661 to 665) by a mechanical link mechanism. When the winning combination is released and the ball wins the upper first to upper fifth winning openings 661 to 665, the upper winning opening (upper first to upper fifth winning openings) won by a mechanical link mechanism. 661 to 665) may be configured to close the accessory disposed at the entrance.

  Similarly, when a ball wins the lower stage operation port 603, the mechanical objects respectively disposed at the entrances of the lower first to upper fifth winning ports 691 to 695 are opened simultaneously, When a ball wins the lower first to upper fifth operation ports 681 to 685, it is arranged at the entrance of the corresponding lower winning port (lower first to lower fifth winning ports 691 to 695) by a mechanical link mechanism. When the provided role is released and a ball is awarded to the lower first to lower fifth winning openings 691 to 695, the lower winning opening (lower first to lower fifth winning prizes) won by a mechanical link mechanism. You may comprise so that the accessory arrange | positioned at the inlet_port | entrance of the opening | mouth 691-695) may close.

  In the first embodiment, all the balls that have entered (winned) into the first entrance 64 are counted by the first entrance passage counter 203b, but are stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 ( You may comprise so that only the ball | bowl to be put on hold may be counted. That is, only when the number N of the operation reservation balls is less than four (the number N of operation reservation balls N = 0 to 4), the first entry port passage counter 203b with respect to the entry (winning) to the first entry port 64. It is good also as a structure which adds 1 to. Specifically, in the start winning process (see FIG. 12), the process of S602 may be executed after the Yes branch process in S603, not after the Yes branch process in S601.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Below, the gaming machine and the modification of the present invention are shown. A state detecting means for detecting occurrence of a predetermined state during a game in which a game medium is passed in a game area and a game value is given to a player according to establishment of a predetermined condition; and the state detecting means detects the state In response to the occurrence of one state, the signal output state is reversed from the first state and maintained for a preset first period, and then reversed again to return to the first state. In a gaming machine comprising a signal output means for outputting a signal, when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means, an elapsed period from the start of the output of the state generation signal is measured A period measurement means, a first arrival determination means capable of determining whether the elapsed period measured by the period measurement means has reached the first period, and the elapsed period by the first arrival determination means. Subsequently, after it is determined that the first period has been reached, the elapsed period measured by the period measuring means is a sum period of the first period and a preset second period. A gaming machine 1 comprising second arrival determination means capable of determining whether or not the vehicle has arrived.

  According to the gaming machine 1, when the state detection means detects the occurrence of a predetermined state during the game in which the game medium is passed through the game area and the game value is given to the player according to the establishment of the predetermined condition. In other words, one state generation signal is output by the signal output means with respect to the occurrence of one detected state. Here, the one state generation signal is generated by inverting the output state of the signal from the first state and maintaining it for a preset first period, and then inverting it again to return to the first state. .

  In such a case, when the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), the elapsed period from the start of the output of the state generation signal Measurement is started by the period measuring means. When measurement of the elapsed period by the period measuring unit is started, first, the first arrival determination unit determines whether the elapsed period has reached the first period, that is, the signal output state is inverted again and the first It is determined whether it is time to return to the state.

  Then, when the first arrival determining means determines that the elapsed period measured by the period measuring means has reached the first period, the elapsed period has subsequently reached the second period set in advance. Is determined. Here, the second period is a period in which a state generation signal can be distinguished in time series by an arithmetic device (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine) that is the output destination of the state generation signal. In this case, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be reliably discriminated by the output destination arithmetic unit. As a result, it is possible to reliably cause the output destination arithmetic device to detect the occurrence of the state detected by the state detecting means.

  Therefore, both the management of the output period of the state generation signal (that is, the first period) and the management of the predetermined period (that is, the second period) after the end of the output of the state generation signal are measured for each period. This can be realized without performing processing for setting the period measurement means in accordance with the start timing. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load associated with outputting the state generation signal to the arithmetic device every time the state is generated.

  The passage from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means to the first period extends from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means to the sum period of the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as counters and timers as period measuring means, and consumption of storage capacity in the storage device can be suppressed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the state detection means described in the gaming machine 1 includes a first entrance port switch, an upper stage operating port switch, and an upper stage operating port switch (none of which are shown). The signal output means described in the machine 1 corresponds to external information processing (S505, S512) and external output processing (S201), and the period measurement means described in the gaming machine 1 includes the signal output management counter 203c. , And the processing of S1504 and S1533 for counting down the signal output management counter 203c, and the first arrival determination means described in the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the processing of S1506 and S1534 and is described in the gaming machine 1. The second arrival determination means corresponds to the processing of S1502 and S1532.

  In the gaming machine 1, when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output unit, the period measuring unit uses a value corresponding to a total period of the first period and the second period as an initial value. Period setting means for setting the elapsed period by subtracting the value set by the period setting means after the signal output means starts outputting the state generation signal. A gaming machine 2 characterized by being measured.

  According to the gaming machine 2, when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means (that is, the output state of the signal is reversed from the first state), the first period and the second period A value corresponding to the sum period is set as an initial value in the period setting means. Thereafter, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started, the elapsed period from the start of the output of the state generation signal is measured by the period measurement means by a method of subtracting the value set by the period setting means. The

  Therefore, since the value set as the initial value in the period measuring unit is a value corresponding to the total period of the first period and the second period, by setting the initial value once in the period measuring unit, It is possible to measure both the progress up to the first period and the total period of the first period and the second period, and the control associated with outputting the state generation signal to the arithmetic unit every time the state occurs The load can be reduced.

  Further, from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means to the first period by the period measuring means in which the value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is set as the initial value. Since both the elapsed time and the elapsed time up to the sum period of the first period and the second period can be measured, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as a counter and a timer as the period measuring means, and the storage device The consumption of storage capacity can be suppressed.

  In each embodiment described above, the processing of S1505 and S1529 corresponds to the period setting means described in the gaming machine 2.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the second period is a period in which an arithmetic unit that is an output destination of the state generation signal can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series. 3

  According to the gaming machine 3, the second period after the completion of the output of the state generation signal is a time series in which the arithmetic device that is the output destination of the state generation signal (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine) Since it is a period in which adjacent state generation signals can be distinguished, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be reliably distinguished by the output destination arithmetic unit. As a result, it is possible to reliably cause the output destination arithmetic device to detect the occurrence of the state detected by the state detecting means.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the second period is a shortest period in which the arithmetic unit can distinguish the state occurrence signals adjacent in time series or a neighboring period longer than the shortest period. A gaming machine 4 characterized.

  According to the gaming machine 4, the second period is the shortest period in which the output destination arithmetic unit can distinguish the state occurrence signals adjacent in time series or a period in the vicinity of the shortest period. The difference between the timing and the output timing of the state generation signal can be reduced. Accordingly, not only can the output destination computing device reliably distinguish adjacent state occurrence signals in time series, but also the maximum time period between the end of output of the state occurrence signal and the start of output of the next state occurrence signal can be maximized or almost maximized. Since it can be shortened to the limit, the data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  The gaming machine 5 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 4, wherein the first period and the second period are substantially the same.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the first period and the second period are substantially the same, that is, after the output of the state generation signal and the output of the state generation signal, the next state generation signal is output to the arithmetic unit that is the output destination. Since the periods necessary for distinguishing between them are substantially the same, management of each period can be facilitated. Further, the difference between the generation timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal can be reduced, and the data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  Here, by setting the second period as a period in which the state generation signal adjacent to the arithmetic unit that is the output destination of the state generation signal in time series can be distinguished, the management of each period is facilitated. The state generation signals adjacent in series can be surely distinguished from each other by the output destination arithmetic unit. In particular, the difference between the generation timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal is reduced by setting the second period to be the shortest period in which the signal can be detected by the output destination arithmetic unit or a period in the vicinity of the shortest period. Data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 5, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit is started, before the elapsed period has been reached by the first arrival determination unit, or If the occurrence of the state is newly detected by the state detection unit before the second arrival determination unit determines that the elapsed period has reached the sum period, the second arrival determination unit Waiting means for waiting for the output of the state occurrence signal by the signal output means for the occurrence of the newly detected state until it is determined that the elapsed period has reached the sum period. A gaming machine 6 characterized.

  According to the gaming machine 6, after the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means, before the first arrival determination means determines that the elapsed period has reached the summing period, or by the second arrival determination means If the occurrence of a state is newly detected by the state detection means before it is determined that the elapsed period has reached the summing period, output of the state generation signal by the signal output means for the occurrence of the newly detected state However, the standby unit waits until it is determined by the second arrival determination unit that the elapsed period has reached the total period. Therefore, the state detected every moment can be reliably detected by the output destination arithmetic unit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first entrance opening counter 203b corresponds to the waiting means described in the gaming machine 6.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 6, the state in which the occurrence is detected by the state detecting means creates a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state or triggered by the passage of the game medium. The gaming machine 7 is characterized in that the game medium passes through a specific passage section.

  According to the gaming machine 7, the passage of the game medium is used as an opportunity to create a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state or has the possibility (for example, a state that is advantageous to the player as a result of the lottery) ) The passage of the game medium to the specific passage portion is detected as the occurrence of the state by the state detection means. Therefore, it is possible to allow the output destination management device to grasp the number of times that the game medium passes to a specific passing section that creates or has a possibility that is advantageous to the player compared to the normal state, and manages such data in the hall This can be used by a person for purposes such as nail adjustment and fraud monitoring.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first entrance 64, the upper specific operation port 602, and the lower specific operation port 603 are illustrated as the specific passing portions described in the gaming machine 7.

  The gaming machine 8 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  The gaming machine 9 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  The gaming machine 10 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
203c Signal output management counter (period measuring means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

Conventionally, centralized management by a hall computer has been carried out on gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slots installed in game halls (for example, Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2). The form of such centralized, for example, a predetermined winning opening (e.g., by winning the game ball starting opening the opportunity for those or lottery occurs) or the starting opening winning signal for indicating that the game ball is won to, game and prize balls signal indicating that award based on a winning to the sphere of winning opening balls are paid out, etc. those have enough in the signal indicating the person or state, a signal corresponding to the various states that occur during the game (hereinafter, this the signals may be referred to as "state generator signal") output from the respective gaming machines to the hall computer, the hall computer side receiving these signals, for example, of those or per based on the received signal out counts and calculates and outgoing counts than in those have enough (base), and the like and output the result to the monitor and paper.

Here, the output of the state generation signal from each gaming machine to the hall computer is started, for example, by generating an ON signal in which the output state is inverted when a predetermined state occurs. The output is terminated by inverting the output state again after continuing the output of the on signal for a first period in which the on signal can be detected (for example, 0.5 s).

On the other hand, distinguishes state generator signal hall computer are adjacent in time series, after inverting the output state again, the output state the second period (e.g., 0.5 s) need to continue only is there. Therefore, when the gaming machine outputs the state generation signal to the hall computer, the first period that is the output period of the ON signal that becomes the state generation signal can be distinguished from the state generation signal that the hall computer is adjacent in time series. It is required to manage the second period, which is a period.

JP-A-7-59935 JP 2005-334218 A

The present invention, in the illustrated game machine or the like, and its object is to provide a gaming machine which makes it possible to suitably perform the output of the signal to an external device such as a hall computer.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a state detecting means for detecting the occurrence of a predetermined state in the Yu technique, for the occurrence of one state detected by the state detecting means, signal after maintaining the first on-state period of the output being state is set in advance by reversed from the off state, and a signal output means for outputting one status signal skip back to the oFF state is reversed again When the on- output is started by the signal output means, a period measuring means for measuring an elapsed period from the start of the on- output and the elapsed period measured by the period measuring means However , it is determined that the elapsed period has reached the first period by a first arrival determination unit capable of determining whether the first period which is an ON period has been reached, and the first arrival determination unit. Pull after Then, the period in which the elapsed time measured by the measuring means, the first period can be determined whether it has reached the second period obtained by combining the period is OFF period set in advance and a second And arrival determination means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably output a signal to an external device such as a hall computer.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which shows typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrates an actual display screen. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in the symbol change process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating external information processing executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 11. It is a timing chart which shows the output timing of a 1st entrance opening signal. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the switch monitoring process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the switch monitoring process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. (A) is a flowchart which shows an upper stage operation port switch process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a lower stage operation port switch process. (A) is a flowchart which shows an upper 1st operation port switch process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a lower 1st operation port switch process. (A) is a flowchart which shows an upper 1st prize port switch process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a lower 1st prize port switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the external information processing performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the output timing of a specific operation port passage signal.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window portion 14 c of the front frame 14. Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner circumference 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 surround the front and rear. A game area to be played is formed. The game area is a substantially circular area that is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37b is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area as viewed from the front (upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being probabilistically changing, operating in a short time, or in a normal state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state, and the symbols corresponding to the probable big hit. Whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an out-of-game symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color. .

  In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 being probable is a game state in which the jackpot probability is increased and it is easy to shift to the special game state. Furthermore, during the probability change in this embodiment, the game is in a state where the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is short-running, it means a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). . In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased). It should be noted that, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 and the number of times the electric accessory is released per hit are changed. It is good as a thing.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance 64 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device 82 composed of a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) that variably displays the second symbol with the passage of the ball of the second entrance 67 as a trigger.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, and for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 includes a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Is arranged. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 until the stop symbol (any one of the probable jackpot symbol, the normal jackpot symbol, or the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of entered balls is held up to 4 times, and the number of held times is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the number of lights of the holding lamp 85. Four hold lamps 85 are provided for the maximum number of holds, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning at the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more. In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically held in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) by the frequency | count. In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not perform lighting display.

  The second symbol display device 82 includes a second symbol display unit 83 and a holding lamp 84, and each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the display unit 83 displays a display symbol (second symbol). The symbol “○” and “x” in FIG. 1 are alternately lit to display a variation, and the variation display is stopped when the variation display stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol “◯”). The entrance 64 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of passes through the second entrance 67 of the sphere is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit on the hold lamp 84. The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps on the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. You may make it carry out using a part of. Similarly, the hold lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, and is not limited to 4 times, or 3 times or less (for example, (8 times). In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. As a result, the main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a and a large opening opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (FIG. 4)). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. Can be visually recognized through the small window 35.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 and a second entrance (through gate) 67. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 has an external output buffer 203a, a first entrance passage counter 203b, and a signal output management counter 203c. Here, the external output buffer 203 a is a buffer that stores setting data of a predetermined size (for example, 1 byte) to be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  The external output buffer 203a is composed of a plurality of setting data bits, and each setting data bit is in a state to be managed during the game (for example, to the first entrance 64 which is a winning entrance that triggers a big winning lottery. A value of 0 (off) or 1 (on) is set according to whether or not the ball has entered (passed) or whether or not the game is a big hit.

  Setting of values in the external output buffer 203a (that is, setting of values in each setting data bit) is updated at an interval of 2 ms that is an execution interval of external information processing (see FIG. 13). As described above, the setting data updated every 2 ms is stored in the external output terminal plate 261 every time the external output process is performed in the main process (see FIG. 8) with 4 ms as one cycle (that is, at intervals of 4 ms). To the hall computer 262.

  The first entrance opening counter 203b is a counter that counts a state in which a ball has passed through the first entrance 64 but the first entrance passage signal corresponding to the passage has not been output. Note that the “first entrance opening passage signal” is an ON signal (see FIG. 14) that is output over a predetermined period (in this embodiment, for 52 ms) with respect to one pass to the first entrance 64. ).

  The first entrance pass counter 203b is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on, and then each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 (that is, the first entrance switch (a part of various switches 208). 1) is added (every time ON) is detected, and 1 is subtracted in external information processing (see FIG. 13) described later every time one first entrance pass signal is output.

  Therefore, if the value of the first entrance port passage counter 203b is 0, the number of first entrance port passage signals corresponding to the number of times the ball has passed to the first entrance port 64 passes through the external output terminal plate 261. It is transmitted to the hall computer 262. On the other hand, when the first entrance passage counter 203b shows a value of 1 or more, the passage of the sphere to the first entrance 64 is detected by the number indicated by the first entrance passage counter 203b. Nevertheless, it indicates that there is a first entry port passing signal that has not been output to the hall computer 262 (not transmitted or waiting).

  The signal output management counter 203c is an output period (first period) of the first entrance pass signal and a period after the output of the first entrance pass signal, and the hall computer 262 arrives next. It is a counter that measures (measures) both the off period (second period) in which the first entrance opening passing signal can be distinguished.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in managing the output period of the first entrance port passing signal to the hall computer 262, as the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c, A value corresponding to the sum period of the period (the output period of the first entrance pass signal) and the second period (the subsequent off period) is set. The control load of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 can be reduced with the output of the first entrance port passing signal.

  In addition to the buffers and counters described above, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. Is stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 8), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 7). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interruption process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a specific prize. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the port 65a as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the external output terminal plate 261 are connected.

  The external output terminal board 261 is configured so that a hall computer 262 can be connected thereto. The external output terminal board 261 receives data output from the main controller 110 (setting data stored in the external output buffer 203a) and relays the data to the hall computer 262.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has an external output buffer (not shown). The external output buffer in the payout control device 111 is a predetermined size (for example, 1) that is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261, similarly to the external output buffer 203a provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Byte) setting data, and includes a plurality of setting data bits (for example, setting data bits for a prize ball signal indicating whether or not a predetermined number of prize balls have been paid out).

  Similarly to the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the RAM 213 stores a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 211, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 211, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which a value such as O is stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, the external output terminal plate 261, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  As described above, the external output terminal board 261 configured to be connected to the hall computer 262 is the data output from the payout control device 111 (setting data stored in an external output buffer (not shown)). And relay the data to the hall computer 262.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 on the condition that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. Then, the launch solenoid is excited, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is a voice output in a voice output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and the display control device 114. The setting of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 performed etc. is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The display control device 114 controls the change display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. It has. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the symbol display command input from the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

  The character ROM 235 has a character information memory (not shown) in which character information such as symbols (background symbols and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. Character information stored in the character information memory (not shown) includes numerical data of the third symbol (for example, 0 to 9) that is variably displayed, and symbol data other than the numerical data (for example, a box symbol or a helmet symbol). Design (see FIG. 5B)), background design, notice character design, character design (for example, boy (see FIG. 5B)), and the like.

  Each character information stored in the character information memory 235a is stored as compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In this embodiment, the character information is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the character information of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character information memory. Character information stored as compressed data in the character information memory is read and decompressed, and then written to a character information storage area (not shown) in the video RAM 234.

  The video RAM 234 is a storage area for display (not shown) in which effect data corresponding to display contents (effect display pattern of variable display, effect contents at reach effect, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. And a character information storage area (not shown) for storing character information decompressed after being read from the character information memory of the character ROM 235.

  A display storage area (not shown) is an area for storing effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By rewriting the contents of the display storage region, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents are changed. In the character information storage area, character information (character data) as a material such as background symbols and decorative symbols is stored, and necessary data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored from the character information storage area. It is read out and written into the display storage area in the video RAM 234.

  The reason why the character information is stored in the character information storage area of the video RAM 234 is that the processing speed is generally higher in the RAM than in the ROM, and the character information is displayed in the video RAM 234 directly from the character ROM 235. This is because if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes a long time to read and smooth display cannot be performed or clear display cannot be performed. Further, this is because it is easy to process display data in the video RAM 234 (for example, change the size of a decorative design or change the color of a background design).

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (not shown), store the information on the occurrence of power interruption in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213, and complete it.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data and the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data. A payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9” and one type of sub-shaped petal shape formed smaller than this main symbol. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box almost fully, and attached symbols imitating characters such as furoshiki and helmets are added. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. It is configured as follows. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added is arranged. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are arranged. Here, the high probability state refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). Further, the normal state (low probability state) refers to a time when the probability of hitting is not probable, and refers to a state where the probability of jackpot is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that during probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. For this reason, a total of 20 third symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub-designs are set in each symbol row, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scrolls from top to bottom with periodicity. The display is changed. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. In the main display area Dm, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set. In each game, the variable display stops in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and the combination of jackpot symbols on one of the active lines at the time of the stop (in this embodiment, the same Jackpot animations are displayed as jackpots.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are usually covered with double-open opaque doors that are electrically opened and closed by solenoids (not shown), and sometimes the solenoids are excited and the doors are on the front side. It is a display area that is visible to the player when it is opened. The center notice area Ds2 is a display area that is always visible without being covered by the door.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols and sub-designs of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are covered and the display screen cannot be visually recognized. If either one of the left and right doors or both doors are opened during the variable display, a video is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and it is easy for the player to change to a big hit than usual. It is suggested. In the center notice area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds in principle, but the third symbol and characters are displayed larger across the display areas Dm and Ds. A display effect can be performed.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 8), or at an interval of 2 ms, an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11), and the updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Stored in the counter buffer. The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball winning timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) is executed. It is updated once and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 8). The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in The number of random number values that are jackpots is set at low probability and high probability, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots at low probability is 2, and the value is “373, 727” There are 14 random numbers that are big hits at high probability, and the values are "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733".

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit, and in this embodiment, one by one is added in order within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value (that is, After reaching 4), it is configured to return to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in In addition, the value of the random number that becomes a high probability state after the jackpot is “1, 2, 3”, the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the jackpot is “0, 4”, and two types of hits are determined. The Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots of a high probability state and a low probability state, and one type of display mode corresponding to a deviation. Any one of the three display modes is selected.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than out of front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) after the occurrence of reach, and the final stop symbol is stopped before and after the reach symbol. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected as “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored.

  Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random number values from which the stop pattern is selected. This is based on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored (that is, the number of reservations), etc. This is to change the stop pattern selection ratio.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide random value range of 10 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected so that a jackpot is likely to occur and a reach effect is not selected more than necessary. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9, making it difficult to select “rear out of front / rear out of reach” or “reach out of front / rear out of reach”. Further, if each random number value is not stored in the holding ball storage area in a low probability state, a disturbance corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely off” in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. A table with a narrow numerical value range of 51 to 238 is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 9 to 50, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and therefore, the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. On the other hand, the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined by the first variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines a variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops after the reach occurs. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 8) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

  For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third variation type counter”. The 3rd symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs the decorative production according to the display mode of the 1st symbol display device 37. A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, the time required for the notice effect is added to the variable time, or on the contrary, the variable time is subtracted to shorten the variable display time, or an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the variable time is selected. . As with the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables with different ranges of random values from which the production pattern is selected, and whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. Depending on the low probability state or in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random value is stored, the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Get when it is done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 8).

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer allocation that is started periodically (in a 2 ms cycle in this embodiment). And NMI interrupt processing described above.

  First, referring to FIG. 7, a startup process when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance in the stack pointer is set, and the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. In order to wait, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 123. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 123 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the main process executed after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted (output) to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side and the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. (S201). By this external output process (S201), for example, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S501 (see FIG. 11) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the number of acquired balls to the payout control device 111 A prize ball command corresponding to is sent. Also, by this external output processing (S201), the fluctuation pattern command, stop symbol command, stop command, effect time addition command, etc. necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. When transmitting or launching a sphere, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Further, the external output processing (S201) causes the data (setting data) set in the external output buffer 203a according to the state of the game in the external information processing (see FIG. 13) to be described later via the external output terminal board 261. To the hall computer 262.

  Each setting data bit constituting the setting data includes a setting data bit that is set to 1 (turned on) when a ball enters the first entrance 64. One first entrance pass signal is formed according to the output state of the data bits.

  More specifically, the first first entrance signal passes through the output state of the corresponding setting data bit from 0 (off), which is the initial state, to 1 (on), and then (in this embodiment, 52 ms). Later, when the output state is returned to 0 (off) again, it is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  Similarly, each setting data bit constituting the setting data stored in the external output buffer 203a includes a setting data bit that is set to 1 when a big hit occurs, and the output state of this setting data bit In response to this, a signal of one big hit is formed. That is, the output state of the corresponding setting data bit is inverted from 0 (off) to 1 (on) with the occurrence of the jackpot, and then the output state is returned to 0 (off) again with the end of the jackpot. One big hit signal is output to the hall computer 262 through the external output terminal board 261.

  Next, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2, and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the big win state (S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is obtained. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (not shown) is executed, the process at the time of power-off after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). It transmits to (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the variation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 8). In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of active suspension balls is greater than 0 (S303). If the number N of active balls is 0 (S303: No), this process is terminated as it is. If the number of the operation hold balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the operation hold ball number N is decremented by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the hold ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and the reserved first area → execution area, reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area. After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the change type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). Whether or not the stop symbol is set is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit, the symbol that becomes a high probability state after the big hit by the value of the first hit type counter C2 Or a symbol that is in a low probability state is determined. In this embodiment, a red LED is turned on when a high probability state is reached after a big hit, a green LED is turned on when a low probability state is reached, and a blue LED is turned on when it is out of place. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S309, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S310). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this stop command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and receives the stop command, whereby one variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 ends.

  Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) executed in the change process (see FIG. 9). In the variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, “373,727” is a winning value among the values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1 at the normal low probability, and “59,109,163, 211,263,317,367, "421,479,523,631,683,733" is the winning value.

  When it is determined that it is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode for the big hit is set (S402). ). In the process of S402, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, whether to shift to the high probability state or shift to the low probability state after the big hit is set. When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit by the process of S402. Of the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, when “0, 4”, the state shifts to the low probability state, and when “1, 2, 3”, the state shifts to the high probability state. .

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. The At this time, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and rough symbol fluctuations such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition to determining the variation time, the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. To do.

  The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation time, and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are respectively defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the fluctuation time can be set using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and can be set only with the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Whether or not to set with both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time.

  If it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, An effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to indicate whether the reach is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 varies depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state and the number of operation suspensions N. So the table is set up.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the detachment symbol. Is determined. At this time, as in the process of S403, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and the normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 , The number of variation symbols).

  When the process of S403 or the process of S405 is completed, the effect time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by the first and second type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S406). At this time, the addition / subtraction of effect time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display The variation time of the device 81 is set. In this embodiment, the addition / subtraction of the production time is determined according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3 when the variation display time is not changed and when the variation display time is added for one second, the variation display time is set to 2 seconds. In the case of addition, four types of addition values for the case of subtracting 1 second from the variable display time are determined.

  In addition, when the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect that increases the expected value of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect that causes the change time of the variable symbol to be longer than usual and is accompanied by a slip) An effect of displaying a notice character is produced, for example, an effect of making the change time of one change symbol shorter than usual and stopping it immediately). In addition, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that an added value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, so that the player expects a big hit by confirming the notice effect. Can do.

  Next, a variation pattern command is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in S403 or S405 (S407), and a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in S402 or S404. (S408). Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the effect time addition value determined in the process of S406 (S409), and the process returns to the variation process.

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When reaching 738, 4, 238, 250), respectively, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  After that, a start winning process (see FIG. 12) associated with winning at the first entrance 64 is executed (S504), and external information for setting the first entrance pass signal to be output to the hall computer 262, etc. The process (see FIG. 13) is executed (S505), the firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with a touch sensor and turns on / off the launch of the ball on the condition that the launch stop switch for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining OFF. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Here, the start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 11).

  When this start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first entrance pass counter 203b (S602).

  After the process of S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of actuated balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603). If there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the number N of activated balls is <4 (S603: Yes), the number N of activated balls is incremented by 1 (S604), and further updated in step S503. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the free reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S605). On the other hand, if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the number N of operation reservation balls is not less than 4 (S603: No). , S604 and S605 are skipped, the start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the external information processing executed in the process of S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing external information processing (S505) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 13, in this external information processing (S505), first, the external output buffer 203a is cleared to 0, that is, all the setting data bits are cleared to 0, and the setting data is cleared (S1501).

  After the processing of S1501, it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1502). If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 as a result of checking in the processing of S1502 (S1502: Yes), the hall computer 262 is in a state where the next first incoming ball passing signal can be distinguished (detected). In this case, it is confirmed whether the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is 0 (S1503).

  As a result of the confirmation in S1503, when the value of the first entrance passage counter 203b is not 0, that is, a value greater than 0 is confirmed (S1502: No), the ball to the first entrance 64 This is a case where there is a first ball pass signal that has not been output to the hall computer 262 (not yet transmitted, in standby), even though the passage of the vehicle is detected. Therefore, in such a case, after 1 is subtracted from the value of the first entrance pass counter 203b (S1504), 52 is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c (S1505), and the time is measured by the signal output management counter 203c. Start (measurement).

  When 52 is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c as a result of the processing in S1505, thereafter, every time this external information processing (S505) is executed until the value of the signal output management counter 203c becomes 0. In addition, the processing of S1509 is executed, and 1 is subtracted each time. Here, since this external information processing (S505) is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 11) executed at intervals of 2 ms, 52 is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c. As a result, a period of 104 ms is counted.

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is not 0, that is, if a value greater than 0 is confirmed (S1502: No), the signal output management counter 203c is measuring the time. Since there is, 1 is subtracted from the value of the signal output management counter 203c (S1509).

  After the processing of S1505 or S1509, it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 26 (S1506). If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 26 (S1506: Yes), the first entry Since the first period (52 ms in this embodiment), which is the output period of the first entrance port passing signal, has not yet elapsed since the output of the mouth passing signal is started, the first output in the external output buffer 203a The setting data bit corresponding to the entrance pass signal is set to 1 (S1507), and the flow proceeds to other setting processing (S1508).

  As a result of the processing of S1507, the external output processing (S201) in the main processing (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is performed in a state where 1 is set in the setting data bit corresponding to the first entrance port passing signal in the external output buffer 203a. ) Is executed, the first entrance port passing signal which is an ON signal is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261.

  On the other hand, when the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 26 or less (S1506: No) as a result of checking by the processing of S1506, the output period of the first entrance pass signal has ended, so S1507 Without moving to other setting processing (S1508).

  Here, as described above, every time the external information processing (S505) is executed, the processing of S1501 is executed first, and the external output buffer 203a is cleared to 0, so that the No branch processing in S1506 is executed. Therefore, when S1507 is skipped, the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the first entrance pass signal remains 0 (off). Therefore, when the branch process of No in S1506 is executed, the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is not the first entrance pass signal (ON signal), An off-state signal is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  Therefore, according to this external information processing (S505), when the branch process of Yes in S1506 is executed, that is, after the output of the first entrance pass signal is started, the first entrance pass signal Until the first period which is the output period elapses, the process of S1507 is executed. As a result, the first entrance is passed to the hall computer 262 over the first period (52 ms in this embodiment). A signal will be output.

  On the other hand, when the branch process of No in S1506 is executed, 1507 is skipped. Therefore, the second period is set as the off period after the first entrance pass signal is output over the first period. The period, that is, the period (52 ms in the present embodiment) in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the first entrance opening passing signals adjacent in time series, is counted.

  If the value of the first entrance opening passage counter 203b is 0 as a result of the confirmation in the process of S1503 (S1502: Yes), the first entrance opening being timed (managed) by the signal output management counter 203c. Since there is neither a passing signal nor a first entrance port passing signal to be output, the process proceeds to other setting processing (S1508).

  In the other setting process (S1508), setting data bits corresponding to signals other than the first entrance opening signal in the external output buffer 203a (for example, a jackpot signal) are updated. After executing the other setting processing (S1508), the external information processing (S505) is terminated and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the external information processing (S505) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the first first entrance pass signal is output to the hall computer 262, the first entrance pass signal is output. A signal output with a value corresponding to a sum period (in this embodiment, 104 ms) of the first period, which is the output period of the first, and the second period after the completion of the output of the first entrance-passing signal as an initial value The management counter 203c is set so that both of these periods (first period and second period) can be managed by only one counter signal output management counter 203c).

  The first advantage of such a configuration is that there is no need to separately prepare a counter for measuring the first period and a counter for measuring the second period, thereby suppressing consumption of storage capacity in the RAM 203. It is a point that can be.

  As a second advantage, two periods (first period) can be obtained without setting a value corresponding to each period at the timing of timing start of each period (first period or second period) in the signal output management counter 203c. And the second period), the control load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced in accordance with the output of the first entrance pass signal to the hall computer 262. It is done.

  Further, according to this external information processing (S505), the number of states in which a ball has passed through the first entrance 64 but the first entrance pass signal corresponding to the passage has not been output (waiting). When the value of the counter 203b is 1 or more, when the signal output management counter 203c becomes 0, the branch processing of Yes in S1503 is executed. Then, the output of the first first entrance pass signal that has been waiting is started.

  That is, when a ball has passed through the first entrance 64 but the first entrance pass signal is being output, the first entrance pass signal cannot be output immediately. From the end of the first entrance pass signal, until the second period in which the hall computer 262 can detect the next first entrance pass signal has passed, Output is awaited. As a result, since the hall computer 262 can reliably distinguish (detect) the individual first entrance pass signals, the passage (winning) of the ball to the first entrance 64 detected every moment, The hall computer 262 can be surely recognized.

  Next, referring to FIG. 14, the first entrance pass signal output from the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment to the hall computer 262 (the output state of the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is 1). Will be described. FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing the output timing of the first entrance pass signal in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 14, a detection signal sg1 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the first entrance 64 is output from the first entrance switch (a part of the various switches 208). When the passage of the sphere to the first entrance 64 is detected by the first entrance switch, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the 1 detection signal sg1 (ie, The output of the first first entrance opening signal ON1 for one winning) is started.

  In starting the output of the first entrance opening signal ON1, the processing of S1505 in the external information processing (see FIG. 13) is executed, and an initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c is such that the output period of the first entrance pass signal ON1 and the hall computer 262 can distinguish the next first entrance pass signal. This value is equivalent to the sum period (in this embodiment, 104 ms) with the off period OF1.

  During the time counting by the signal output management counter 203c, it is determined that the output period (52 ms in this embodiment) of the first entrance port passing signal has elapsed by the determination processing of S1506 in the external information processing (see FIG. 13). Then, by returning the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a from 1 to 0, the output of the first entrance pass signal ON1 is ended.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 104 ms, which is the sum period of the output period of the first entrance opening signal ON1 and the off period OF1, is set in the signal output management counter 203c as an initial value. Even when the signal output management counter 203c measures the output period of 52 ms, the value of the signal output management counter 203c does not reach 0. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the signal output management counter 203c sets an initial value for measuring the off period OF1 even after the output of the first entrance pass signal ON1 is completed. The OFF period OF1 (in this embodiment, 52 ms) can be continuously counted without any problem.

  On the other hand, before the value of the signal output management counter 203c, whose initial value is set with the start of output of the first entrance pass signal ON1, reaches 0, that is, in the present embodiment, the first entrance If a new detection signal sg2 is output from the first entrance switch before 104 ms elapses from the start of output of the passage signal ON1, it waits for the value of the signal output management counter 203c to reach zero. After that, the output of the first entrance opening signal ON2 with respect to the detection signal sg2 is started.

  That is, the first entrance pass signal ON2 with respect to the detection signal sg2 is set in advance so that the hall computer 262 can distinguish the first entrance pass signal ON2 after the output of the first entrance pass signal ON1. The output is awaited until the off period OF1 has elapsed. Thus, since the first entrance opening signal ON2 is output after the off period OF1 has elapsed after the end of the output of the first entrance entrance signal ON1, the hall computer 262 receives the first entrance entrance signal ON2. The passage signal ON2 can be reliably detected.

  In addition, when the output of the first entrance opening signal ON2 is started, the signal output management counter 203c includes the first entrance opening pass signal as in the case of the first entrance entrance signal ON1. A value corresponding to the sum period of the output period of ON2 and the off period OF2 is set as an initial value, and a new detection signal is output from the first entrance switch before the value of the signal output management counter 203c reaches 0. In the case of the output, the first entrance pass signal corresponding to the new detection signal is output after the OFF period OF2 has passed since the end of the output of the first entrance pass signal ON2. Become.

  On the other hand, when a new detection signal sg3 is output from the first entrance switch after the value of the signal output management counter 203c becomes 0, the initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c. Output of the first entrance opening signal ON3 with respect to the detection signal sg3 is started.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the first entrance pass signal is output to the hall computer 262, the output of the first entrance pass signal (ON signal) is started. At the same time, the timing of the period is started. After the start of such timing, it is first determined whether or not the first period, which is the output period of the signal, has elapsed, and if it is determined that the first period has elapsed, Subsequent to the time measurement, the hall computer 262 measures the second period, which is an off period in which the first entrance port passing signals adjacent in time series can be distinguished. Then, in order to determine the arrival of the second period, whether or not the second period has elapsed, that is, from the output of the first entrance pass signal, the first period and the second period A determination is made whether the summing period has elapsed.

  Therefore, the management of the output period (that is, the first output period) of the first entrance port passing signal and the off period (that is, the second output period) after the output of the first entrance port passing signal ends. Management can be realized without setting the period to be timed according to the timing of timing start of each period. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load applied to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in accordance with the output of the first entrance pass signal that is performed every time the ball enters the first entrance 64 (winning).

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the output of the first entrance opening signal is started, a value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is output as the initial value. By setting to the management counter 203c and counting down every predetermined time, both the first period and the second period are counted by the one counter (signal output management counter 203c).

  Therefore, there is no need to separately prepare a counter for counting the first period and a counter for counting the second period, and consumption of storage capacity in the RAM 203 can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, the first period set in advance as the output period of the first entrance port passing signal and the second period set in advance as the off period after the output of the first entrance port passing signal ends. Although the period is configured as the same value (52 ms), these periods are not limited to being the same, and even if the first period is longer than the second period, the first period is The period may be shorter than the second period.

  Here, the management of each period can be facilitated by setting the first period and the second period to the same or substantially the same value. In particular, the second period is defined as the shortest period during which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the first entrance passage signals adjacent in time series, or a neighboring period longer than the shortest period (for example, the shortest period is a number). If the first period and the second period are set to the same or substantially the same value, there is an unoutputted (standby) first entrance pass signal. In addition, the timing at which the ball has passed through the first entrance 64 (the timing at which the ball has been detected by the first entrance switch) and the output of the first entrance passage signal to be output next during standby. The difference from the timing can be reduced. Therefore, the time required for the output period and the output OFF period can be shortened as a whole for one first entrance signal, and data (this embodiment illustrating the first entrance signal) In the form, winning data) acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  Note that, regardless of whether the length of the first period and the length of the second period are the same or different from each other, the second period is the same as the time period in which the hall computer 262 is adjacent in time series. By setting the one entrance port passing signal to a distinguishable period, each of the first entrance port passing signals adjacent in time series can be reliably detected (distinguished) by the hall computer 262.

  Further, regardless of whether the length of the first period is the same as the length of the second period, or the length of the second period is different, the hall computer 262 is adjacent to the second period in time series. It is preferable to set a shortest period in which one entrance entrance signal can be distinguished, or a neighboring period longer than the shortest period. By setting at least the second period to be the shortest period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the first entrance port passing signals adjacent in time series, or a neighboring period longer than the shortest period, When there is a 1 entrance entrance signal, the difference between the timing at which the sphere passes through the 1 entrance entrance 64 and the output timing of the 1 entrance entrance signal to be output next while waiting is reduced. can do. Therefore, not only can the hall computer 262 reliably detect (distinguish) each of the first entrance pass signals adjacent in time series, but also after the first entrance pass signal has been output, The period until the start of the output of the ball passage signal can be shortened to the maximum or almost the maximum, and the data acquisition efficiency can be effectively improved.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above are different in the configuration of the game area located in the center of the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIGS. 3 and 15). Accordingly, the contents of the game are different. In the second embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  15 and 16 are front views of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 15 illustrates a case where all of the ten electric components 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a, 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, and 695a are in the closed position. On the other hand, FIG. 16 illustrates a case in which all of the ten electric components 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a, 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, and 695a are in the open position. In FIG. 16, illustration of a ball guiding nail is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment includes a base plate 60, a large number of ball nails (not shown in FIG. 16), windmills and rails 61 and 62, A winning port 601, an upper stage operating port 602, a lower stage operating port 603, and ten winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, 645, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 and the like are assembled. Here, the general winning port 601, the upper operating port 602, the lower operating port 603, and the ten winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, 645, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 are the pachinko machines of the first embodiment. Like the first entrance 64 in the machine 10, it is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a general winning opening 601 is disposed at the upper part of the game area of the game board 13. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is configured such that when a ball wins (wins) in the general winning opening 601, 10 balls are paid out as a winning ball for one win.

  An upper operation opening 602 is disposed below the general winning opening 601 (vertical direction in FIGS. 15 and 16). In the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the fact that the ball has won the upper stage operating port 602 indicates that the upper stage operating port switch provided on the back side of the upper stage operating port 602 in the game board 13 (part of various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17). ), 10 balls are awarded as winning balls per prize, and five electric actors 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a are simultaneously moved from the closed position (FIG. 15) to the open position (FIG. 15). 16).

  Below the upper stage operating port 602, five winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, 645 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIGS. 15 and 16). These winning units 641, 642, 643, 644, 645 are units configured in the same manner. In the following description, the winning unit 641 is representatively described.

  The winning unit 641 is provided at the upper first operating port 651 provided at the top, the upper first winning port 661 provided below the upper first operating port 651, and the entrance of the upper first winning port 661. It is a unit that is configured to include the electric accessory 661a. The electric accessory 661a is driven by the upper first prize opening solenoid 210a (see FIG. 17), and is in the closed position (the state shown in FIG. 15) or the open position opened in the left-right direction from the closed position (see FIG. 16). (Shown state).

  The upper first operation port 651 is configured to be able to enter the ball at all times, and the fact that a ball has won the first operation port 651 is provided on the back side of the upper first operation port 651 in the game board 13. When detected by the first operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17), ten balls are paid out as a winning ball per winning and the electric accessory 661a is moved from the closed position (FIG. 16). It is configured to move to the open position (FIG. 15).

  The upper first winning port 661 has a front surface covered with a cover extending from the front surface of the upper first working port 651, and is configured such that passage of a ball is restricted depending on the position of the electric accessory 661a. . Specifically, when the electric accessory 661a is in the open position (FIG. 16), it is possible to pass a ball (winning) to the upper first winning port 661, but the electric accessory 661a is in the closed position ( In the case of FIG. 15), it is impossible to pass the ball to the upper first winning opening 661. That is, the upper first winning port 661 can pass the ball only when (1) the ball wins the upper stage operating port 602 or (2) the ball wins the upper first operating port 651. .

  The fact that the ball has won the upper first prize opening 661 is confirmed by an upper first prize opening switch (a part of various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17) provided on the back side of the upper first prize opening 661 in the game board 13. When detected, 10 balls are awarded as winning balls per winning and the electric accessory 661a is moved from the open position (FIG. 16) to the closed position (FIG. 15). Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the closed electric combination 661a is opened by the passage of the ball to the upper stage operation port 602 or the upper first operation port 651, and the opened electric combination 661a is The ball is closed again by winning a ball to the first winning port 661.

  As for the winning units 642 to 645, (1) “upper first operating port 651” in the above description for the winning unit 641 is the upper operating port (upper second to upper fifth operating port) corresponding to the winning unit. (2) “Upper first winning port 661” is replaced with upper winning ports (upper second to upper fifth winning ports 662 to 665) corresponding to the winning unit, and (3) “Electric The winning combination 661a ”is read as the electric winning combination (electric winning combination 662a to 665a) corresponding to the winning unit, and (4)“ up first winning opening solenoid 210a ”is replaced with the winning opening solenoid corresponding to the winning unit (upper no. 2 to the upper fifth winning port solenoid 210b to 210e (see FIG. 17)), and (5) “upper first operating port switch” is replaced with the upper operating port switch (upper second to upper fifth switch corresponding to the winning unit). Product (6) "Upper first winning port switch" is replaced with an upper winning port switch (upper second to upper second) corresponding to the winning unit. What is necessary is just to read as 5 winning a prize mouth switch (all are a part of various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17).

  A lower operation port 603 is disposed below the third winning unit 643. In the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, when a ball wins the lower stage operating port 603, 10 balls are paid out as a winning ball per winning, and five electric actors 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, 695a are all at once. It is configured to be moved from the closed position (FIG. 15) to the open position (FIG. 16).

  Below the lower operation port 603, five winning units 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. These winning units 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 are all units configured similarly to the winning unit 641 described above.

  Therefore, for the winning units 671 to 675, (1) “upper first operating port 651” in the above description for the winning unit 641 is the lower operating port (lower first to lower fifth operating port) corresponding to the winning unit. 682-685), (2) “upper first winning port 661” is replaced with lower winning ports (lower first through lower fifth winning ports 691-695) corresponding to the winning unit, and (3) “electrical” "Household 661a" is read as an electric winning combination (electric winning combination 691a to 695a) corresponding to the winning unit, and (4) "Upper first winning opening solenoid 210a" is replaced with a lower winning opening solenoid corresponding to the winning unit (lower The first to lower fifth winning opening solenoids 210f to 210j (see FIG. 17)) are replaced with (5) “upper first operating opening switch” and lower operating opening switches (lower first to lower second opening corresponding to the winning units). (6) “Upper first winning port switch” is replaced with lower winning port switch (lower first to lower) corresponding to the winning unit. What is necessary is just to read as a 5th winning a prize mouth switch (all are a part of various switches 208 shown in FIG. 17).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, all five top winning ports (upper first to fifth fifth winning ports 661 to 665) are in a state where a winning can be achieved by winning a ball to the upper stage operating port 602. An advantageous gaming state occurs. Similarly, when a ball wins the lower stage operating port 603, all five lower winning ports (lower first to lower fifth winning ports 691 to 695) are in a state where they can win, and the most advantageous gaming state is generated. It will be.

  The pachinko machine of the present embodiment outputs a specific operation port passage signal to the hall computer 262 every time a ball wins the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 that can generate the most advantageous gaming state. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, when the hall computer 262 receives the specific operation port passage signal, the hall computer 262 displays the data displayed in the vicinity of the pachinko machine (for example, the upper part of the pachinko machine) over the ON period of the received specific operation port passage signal. A control signal is output to make the device blink.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the output period (ON period) of one specific operating port passage signal is initially set to 30 s. However, although details will be described later, when a winning of a ball to the upper stage operating port 602 or the lower stage operating port 603 is detected at a relatively short interval, an output period of a specific operating port passing signal that is output during or after the output. Is shorter than the initial set value (30 s in this embodiment).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, even when a ball wins the upper stage operating port 602 or the lower stage operating port 603 at relatively short intervals, the winning timing and the output start timing of the specific operating port passing signal (or The reception timing of the specific operation port passage signal in the hall computer 262 can be suppressed from greatly deviating.

  FIG. 17 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. The RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the second embodiment includes an external output buffer 203a, a signal output management counter 203c, a specific operation port passage counter 203d, an upper first winning port opening flag 203e, and an upper second winning port. An open flag 203f, an upper third prize opening open flag 203g, an upper fourth prize opening open flag 203h, an upper fifth prize opening open flag 203i, a lower first prize opening open flag 203j, Lower second winning opening open flag 203k, lower third winning opening open flag 203l, lower fourth winning opening open flag 203m, lower fifth winning opening open flag 203n, and contents of internal register of MPU 201 And a stack area for storing a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like.憶 is the working area and a (working area).

  The specific operation port passage counter 203d is a counter that counts a state in which a ball has passed through the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603, but a specific operation port passage signal corresponding to the passage has not been output. Note that the “specific operation port passage signal” is an ON signal that is output over a predetermined period (in this embodiment, a maximum of 30 seconds) for one pass to the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603. 25).

  The specific operation port passage counter 203d is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on, and then each time a ball enters the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 (that is, the upper operation port switch or the lower operation port switch (various switches) Every time a part of 208 (on) is detected, 1 is added, and every time one specific operation port passage signal is output, 1 is subtracted in external information processing (see FIG. 24) described later.

  Therefore, if the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d is 0, the number of specific operation port passage signals corresponding to the number of times the ball has passed to the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 has already been transmitted to the hall computer 262. Indicates that On the other hand, when the specific operating port passage counter 203d shows a value of 1 or more, the passage of the ball to the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 is detected by the number indicated by the specific operation port passage counter 203d. Regardless, it indicates that there is a specific operation port passage signal that is not output (not transmitted, waiting) to the hall computer 262.

  The upper first winning opening open flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the electric accessory 661a provided at the entrance of the upper first winning opening 661 is open, and the electric accessory 661a is open. Indicates ON in some cases. Similarly, the upper second to fifth fifth winning opening opening flags 203f to 203i are flags indicating whether or not the electric accessories 662a to 665a are open, respectively, and indicate ON if they are open. .

  The lower first prize opening open flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the electric accessory 691a provided at the entrance of the lower first prize opening 691 is open, and the electric accessory 691a is open. Indicates ON in some cases. Similarly, the lower second to lower fifth winning opening open flags 203k to 203n are flags that indicate whether or not the electric accessories 692a to 695a are open, respectively, and indicate ON if they are open. .

  The input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and an upper first for driving to open / close the electric accessory 661a. The winning prize solenoid 210a, the upper second winning prize solenoid 210b for driving to open / close the electric accessory 662a, the upper third winning prize solenoid 210c for opening / closing the electric accessory 663a, and the electric accessory 664a to open / close. The upper fourth winning opening solenoid 210d, the upper fifth winning opening solenoid 210e for opening and closing the electric accessory 665a, the lower first winning opening solenoid 210f for opening and closing the electric accessory 691a, and the electric accessory 692a. Lower second prize opening solenoid 210g for opening / closing driving, lower second for opening / closing driving of electric accessory 693a The winning opening solenoid 210h, the lower fourth winning opening solenoid 210i for driving the electric accessory 694a to open and close, the lower fifth winning opening solenoid 210j for opening and closing the electric accessory 695a, and the external output terminal plate 261 are connected. Yes.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. Note that the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is also similar to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. The main process is roughly divided into a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment at a cycle of 2 ms), and an NMI interrupt process.

  Here, the start-up process and the NMI process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment are the start-up process (see FIG. 7) and the NMI process executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. This is the same processing as that (not shown). The main process executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is the same as that of S202 to S206, S209, and S210 in the main process (see FIG. 8) executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The process is omitted. That is, the main process executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is the process of S207 after the execution of the external output process (S201).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing according to the second embodiment. The timer process of the second embodiment is also executed at predetermined intervals (in this embodiment, every 2 ms) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, similarly to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) of the first embodiment. Is done.

  In the timer interrupt process of the second embodiment, first, a switch read process is executed (S501). In this switch reading process (S501), various switches 208 (for example, upper stage operating port switch, upper first to fifth operating port switch, upper first to fifth winning port switch, lower stage operating port switch, lower first to first operating port switch, 5 operating port switches, lower first to fifth winning port switches, etc.) are read, and the detection information (winning detection information) is acquired by determining the state of the switches.

  Next, a switch monitoring process for performing each setting according to the winning detection information acquired by the switch reading process (S501) is executed (S511), and various signals such as a specific operation port passing signal to be output to the hall computer 262 are set. External information processing (that is, setting of each setting data bit of the external output buffer 203a) is executed (S512), a firing control process is executed (S506), and this timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Here, the switch monitoring process (S511) will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20 are flowcharts showing the switch monitoring process (S511) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the switch monitoring process (S511) of the second embodiment, first, it is determined whether a sphere has passed through an upper stage operating port switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the upper stage operating port 602. If it confirms (S2501) and passes (S2501: Yes), the upper stage operation port switch process mentioned later is performed (S2502).

  After the execution of the upper stage operating port switch process (S2502), or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2501, if the ball does not pass through the upper stage operating port switch (S2501: No), it is provided in the upper first operating port 651. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the first operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208) (S2503). As a result of checking in the process of S2503, if the ball passes through the upper first operation port switch (S2503: Yes), an upper first operation port switch process described later is executed (S2504).

  After the execution of the upper first operation port switch process (S2504) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2503, when the ball does not pass through the upper first operation port switch (S2503: No), the upper second operation port switch It is confirmed whether the ball has passed through the upper second operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 652 (S2505). As a result of checking in the process of S2505, if the ball passes through the upper second operation port switch (S2505: Yes), an upper second operation port switch process described later is executed (S2506).

  After the execution of the upper second operation port switch process (S2506) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2505, when the ball does not pass through the upper second operation port switch (S2505: No), the upper third operation port operation It is confirmed whether the ball has passed through the upper third operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 653 (S2507). If the ball passes through the upper third operation port switch as a result of the confirmation in S2507 (S2507: Yes), an upper third operation port switch process described later is executed (S2508).

  After the execution of the upper third operation port switch process (S2508) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2507, if the ball does not pass through the upper third operation port switch (S2507: No), the upper fourth operation port operation It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the upper fourth operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 654 (S2509). As a result of checking in the process of S2509, if the ball passes through the upper fourth operation port switch (S2509: Yes), the upper fourth operation port switch process described later is executed (S2510).

  After the execution of the upper fourth operation port switch process (S2510) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2509, when the ball does not pass through the upper fourth operation port switch (S2509: No), the upper fifth operation port operation It is confirmed whether or not the sphere has passed through the upper fifth operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 655 (S2511). As a result of checking in the process of S2511, if the ball has passed through the upper fifth operation port switch (S2511: Yes), an upper fifth operation port switch process described later is executed (S2512).

  After the execution of the upper fifth operation port switch process (S2512) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2511, if the ball has not passed through the upper fifth operation port switch (S2511: No), the upper first prize It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the upper first prize opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the mouth 661 (S2513). As a result of checking in the process of S2513, if the ball has passed the upper first prize opening switch (S2513: Yes), an upper first prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2514).

  After the execution of the upper first prize opening switch process (S2514) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2513, if the ball has not passed the upper first prize opening switch (S2513: No), the upper second prize winning prize switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the upper second prize opening switch (a part of various switches 208) provided at the mouth 662 (S2515). As a result of checking in the process of S2515, if the ball has passed the upper second prize opening switch (S2515: Yes), an upper second prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2516).

  After the execution of the upper second prize opening switch process (S2516) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2515, when the ball has not passed the upper second prize opening switch (S2515: No), the upper third prize winning prize switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the upper third prize opening switch (a part of various switches 208) provided at the mouth 663 (S2517). As a result of checking in the process of S2517, if the ball has passed the upper third prize opening switch (S2517: Yes), an upper third prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2518).

  After the execution of the upper third prize opening switch process (S2518) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2517, if the ball has not passed the upper third prize opening switch (S2517: No), the upper fourth prize winning prize switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the upper fourth prize opening switch (a part of various switches 208) provided at the mouth 664 (S2519). As a result of checking in the process of S2519, if the ball has passed the upper fourth prize opening switch (S2519: Yes), an upper fourth prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2520).

  After the execution of the upper fourth winning opening switch process (S2520) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2519, if the ball has not passed through the upper fourth winning opening switch (S2519: No), the upper fifth winning prize switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the upper fifth prize opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the mouth 665 (S2521). As a result of checking in the processing of S2521, if the ball has passed the upper fifth winning opening switch (S2521: Yes), the upper fifth winning opening switch processing described later is executed (S2522).

  After the execution of the upper fifth winning opening switch process (S2522) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2521, if the ball has not passed through the upper fifth winning opening switch (S2521: No), the process of S2523 ( (See FIG. 20).

  As shown in FIG. 20, in S2523, it is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower-stage operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided in the lower-stage operating port 603 (S2523). As a result of checking in the process of S2523, if the ball passes through the lower-stage operating port switch (S2523: Yes), the lower-stage operating port switch process described later is executed (S2524).

  After the execution of the lower operation port switch process (S2524) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2523, when the ball does not pass through the lower operation port switch (S2523: No), it is provided in the lower first operation port 681. It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed the lower first operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) (S2525). If the ball passes through the lower first operation port switch as a result of the confirmation in S2525 (S2525: Yes), the lower first operation port switch process described later is executed (S2526).

  After the execution of the lower first operation port switch process (S2526) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2525, when the ball does not pass through the lower first operation port switch (S2525: No), the lower second operation port switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower second operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 682 (S2527). If the ball passes through the lower second operation port switch as a result of the confirmation in S2527 (S2527: Yes), the lower second operation port switch process described later is executed (S2528).

  After the execution of the lower second operation port switch process (S2528) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2527, when the ball does not pass through the lower second operation port switch (S2527: No), the lower third operation port operation It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower third operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 683 (S2529). If the ball passes through the lower third operation port switch as a result of the confirmation in S2529 (S2529: Yes), the lower third operation port switch process described later is executed (S2530).

  After the execution of the lower third operating port switch process (S2530) or as a result of confirmation by the processing of S2529, if the ball does not pass through the lower third operating port switch (S2529: No), the lower fourth operating port switch process It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower fourth operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 684 (S2531). As a result of checking in the process of S2531, if the ball passes through the lower fourth operating port switch (S2531: Yes), the lower fourth operating port switch process described later is executed (S2532).

  After the execution of the lower fourth operation port switch process (S2532) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2531, if the ball does not pass through the lower fourth operation port switch (S2531: No), the lower fifth operation port operation It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower fifth operation port switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the port 685 (S2533). As a result of checking in the process of S2533, if the ball has passed through the lower fifth operation port switch (S2533: Yes), the lower fifth operation port switch process described later is executed (S2534).

  After the execution of the lower fifth operating port switch process (S2534) or as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2533, if the ball does not pass through the lower fifth operating port switch (S2533: No), the lower first winning prize It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower first prize opening switch (a part of various switches 208) provided in the mouth 691 (S2535). If the ball passes through the lower first prize opening switch as a result of the confirmation in S2535 (S2535: Yes), the lower first prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2536).

  After the execution of the lower first prize opening switch process (S2536) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2535, if the ball does not pass through the lower first prize opening switch (S2535: No), the lower second prize winning prize switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower second prize opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the mouth 692 (S2537). As a result of checking in the processing of S2537, if the ball has passed the lower second prize opening switch (S2537: Yes), lower second prize opening switch processing described later is executed (S2538).

  After the execution of the lower second prize opening switch process (S2538) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2537, if the ball has not passed the lower second prize opening switch (S2537: No), the lower third prize winning prize switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed through the lower third prize opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided in the mouth 693 (S2539). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2539, if the ball has passed the lower third prize opening switch (S2539: Yes), the lower third prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2540).

  After the execution of the lower third prize opening switch process (S2540) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2539, if the ball has not passed the lower third prize opening switch (S2539: No), the lower fourth prize winning switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed the lower fourth prize opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided in the mouth 694 (S2541). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S2541, if the ball has passed the lower fourth prize opening switch (S2541: Yes), the lower fourth prize opening switch process described later is executed (S2542).

  After the execution of the lower fourth prize opening switch process (S2542) or as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2541, if the ball does not pass through the lower fourth prize opening switch (S2541: No), the lower fifth prize winning switch It is confirmed whether or not the ball has passed the lower fifth prize opening switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided at the mouth 695 (S2543). As a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2543, if the ball has passed through the lower fifth winning opening switch (S2543: Yes), lower fifth winning opening switch processing described later is executed (S2544).

  After the execution of the lower fifth prize opening switch process (S2544) or as a result of confirmation by the process of S2543, when the ball has not passed the lower fifth prize opening switch (S2543: No), the general prize opening 601 A process (other switch process) according to the detection of the sphere by other switches such as a switch (not shown) for detecting the passage of the sphere to (S2545) is executed, and the switch monitoring process (S511) is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 21A, the above-described upper operation port switch process (S2502) will be described. FIG. 21A is a flowchart showing the upper stage operation port switch process (S2502) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in this upper stage operation port switch process (S2502), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2601). The prize ball counter is a counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, and counts the number of times (winning number) that a prize ball should be obtained. The prize ball counter is configured to be cleared to 0 when the power is turned on and the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 111 is set.

  After the processing of S2601, 1 is added to the specific operating port passage counter 203d (S2602), the upper first to upper fifth winning port solenoids 210a to 210e are turned on (S2603), and the upper first to upper fifth winning ports are being opened. The flags 203e to 203i are turned on (S2604), and the upper operation port switch process (S2502) is terminated.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the upper stage operating port 602, the processing of S2603 is executed, and as a result, the electric accessories 661a to 665a associated with the upper first to upper fifth winning ports 661 to 665 are all at once. Released.

  In addition, with reference to FIG. 21 (b), the above-described lower operation port switch process (S2524) will be described. FIG. 21B is a flowchart showing the lower operation port switch process (S2524) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 21 (b), in this lower stage operation port switch process (S2524), first, 1 is added to the prize ball counter (not shown) (S2611), and 1 is added to the specific operation port passage counter 203d. (S2612).

  After the processing of S2612, the lower first to lower fifth winning opening solenoids 210f to 210j are turned on (S2613), and the lower first to lower fifth winning opening opening flags 203j to 203n are turned on (S2614). The mouth switch process (S2524) is terminated.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the lower stage operating port 603, the processing of S2613 is executed, and as a result, the electric accessories 691a to 695a associated with the lower first to lower fifth winning ports 691 to 695 are all at once. Released.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22A, the above-described first working port switch process (S2504) will be described. FIG. 22A is a flowchart showing the upper first operation port switch process (S2504) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 22 (a), in the upper first operation port switch process (S2504), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2621), and the upper first prize port open flag is displayed. It is confirmed whether 203e is off (S2622).

  As a result of checking in the processing of S2622, if the upper first winning opening open flag 203e is OFF (S2622: Yes), the electric accessory 661a associated with the upper first winning opening 661 is in the closed position, so that it is in the open position. The upper first winning opening solenoid 210a is turned on (S2623), the upper first winning opening release flag 203e is turned on (S2624), and the upper first operation opening switch process (S2504) is ended.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the processing of S2622, if the upper first prize opening open flag 203e is on (S2622: No), the electric accessory 661a associated with the upper first prize opening 661 is already in the open position. Therefore, the first operation port switch process (S2504) is terminated without performing the processes of S2623 and S2624.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the upper first operation port 651, the processing of S2623 is executed, and as a result, only the electric accessory 661a associated with the upper first winning port 661 is opened.

  The upper second working port switch process (S2506), the upper third working port switch process (S2508), the upper fourth working port switch process (S2510), and the upper fifth working port switch process (S2512) are also described above. The same process as the upper first operation port switch process (S2504) is performed. That is, in the upper first operating port switch process (S2504), the “upper first winning port solenoid 210a” is a winning port solenoid (upper second to upper fifth winning ports corresponding to the operating port switch that detected the passage of the ball. Solenoids 210b to 210e), “Upper first winning opening open flag 203e” is replaced with a winning opening open flag (upper second to upper fifth winning opening opened) corresponding to the operation port switch that detected the passage of the ball. The flag 203f to 203i) may be read.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the upper second operation port 652, only the electric accessory 662a associated with the upper second game port 662 is released as a result of the upper second operation port switch process (S2506). Similarly, when a ball is won in the upper third operating port 653, only the electric accessory 663a associated with the upper third winning port 663 is opened as a result of the upper third operating port switch process (S2508). . Further, when a ball wins the upper fourth operating port 654, only the electric accessory 664a associated with the upper fourth winning port 664 is opened as a result of the upper fourth operating port switch process (S2510), and the upper When a ball is won at the fifth operating port 655, only the electric accessory 665a associated with the upper fifth winning port 665 is opened as a result of the upper fifth operating port switch process (S2512).

  In addition, with reference to FIG. 22B, the lower first operation port switch process (S2526) will be described. FIG. 22B is a flowchart showing the lower first operation port switch process (S2526) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 22 (b), in the lower first operation port switch process (S2526), first, 1 is added to the prize ball counter (not shown) (S2631), and the lower first prize opening opening flag is set. It is checked whether 203j is off (S2632).

  As a result of checking in the processing of S2632, if the lower first winning opening open flag 203j is OFF (S2632: Yes), the electric accessory 691a associated with the lower first winning opening 691 is in the closed position, so the open position The lower first prize opening solenoid 210f is turned on (S2633), the lower first prize opening open flag 203j is turned on (S2634), and the lower first operation opening switch process (S2526) is terminated.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2632, if the lower first prize opening open flag 203j is on (S2632: No), the electric accessory 691a associated with the lower first prize opening 691 is already in the open position. Therefore, the lower first operation port switch process (S2526) is terminated without performing the processes of S2633 and S2634.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the lower first operation opening 681, the process of S2633 is executed, and as a result, only the electric accessory 691a associated with the lower first winning opening 691 is opened.

  The lower second working port switch process (S2528), the lower third working port switch process (S2530), the lower fourth working port switch process (S2532), and the lower fifth working port switch process (S2534) are also described above. The same processing as the lower first operation port switch processing (S2526) is performed. That is, in the lower first operating port switch process (S2526), the “lower first winning port solenoid 210f” is the winning port solenoid (lower second to lower fifth winning ports corresponding to the operating port switch that detected the passage of the ball). Solenoids 210g to 210j), “lower first winning opening open flag 203j” is replaced with a winning opening open flag (lower second to lower fifth winning opening opened) corresponding to the operation port switch that detected the passage of the ball. Flag 203k to 203n).

  Therefore, when a ball is won in the lower second operating port 682, only the electric accessory 692a associated with the lower second winning port 692 is opened as a result of the lower second operating port switch process (S2528). Similarly, when a ball is won at the lower third operating port 683, only the electric accessory 693a associated with the lower third winning port 693 is opened as a result of the lower third operating port switch process (S2530). . When a ball wins the lower fourth operating port 684, only the electric accessory 694a associated with the lower fourth winning port 694 is opened as a result of the lower fourth operating port switch process (S2532). When a ball is won at the fifth operating port 685, only the electric accessory 695a associated with the lower fifth winning port 695 is opened as a result of the lower fifth operating port switch process (S2534).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23A, the above-described first first prize opening switch process (S2514) will be described. FIG. 23A is a flowchart showing the upper first winning opening switch process (S2514) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 23 (a), in the upper first prize opening switch process (S2514), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2641), and the upper first prize opening solenoid 210a is turned on. Turn off (S2642). After the process of S2642, the upper first prize opening open flag 203e is turned off (S2642), and the upper first prize opening switch process (S2514) is ended.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the upper first winning opening 661, the processing of S2642 is executed, and as a result, the opened electric accessory 661a of the upper first winning opening 661 is closed. .

  In addition, the upper second prize port switch process (S2516), the upper third prize port switch process (S2518), the upper fourth prize port switch process (S2520), and the upper fifth prize port switch process (S2522) are also described above. The same process as the upper first prize opening switch process (S2514) is performed. That is, the “upper first prize opening solenoid 210a” in the upper first prize opening switch process (S2514) is the prize opening solenoid (upper second to upper fifth prize opening corresponding to the prize opening switch that detected the passage of the ball. Solenoids 210b to 210e), “Upper first winning opening open flag 203e” is replaced with a winning opening open flag (upper second to upper fifth winning opening opened) corresponding to the winning opening switch that detected the passage of the ball. The flag 203f to 203i) may be read.

  Therefore, when a ball is won at the upper second winning opening 662, as a result of the upper second winning opening switch process (S2516), the opened electric accessory 662a of the upper second winning opening 662 is closed. . Similarly, when a ball is won at the upper third winning opening 663, the opened electric combination 663a of the upper third winning opening 663 is closed as a result of the upper third winning opening switch process (S2518). The Further, when the ball has won the upper fourth winning opening 664, as a result of the upper fourth winning opening switch process (S2520), the opened electric accessory 664a of the upper fourth winning opening 664 is closed, When the ball has won the upper fifth winning opening 665, as a result of the upper fifth winning opening switch process (S2522), the opened electric accessory 665a of the upper fifth winning opening 665 is closed. Become.

  In addition, with reference to FIG. 23B, the above-described lower first prize opening switch process (S2536) will be described. FIG. 23B is a flowchart showing the lower first prize port switch process (S2536) executed in the switch monitoring process (FIGS. 19 and 20).

  As shown in FIG. 23 (b), in the lower first prize opening switch process (S2536), first, 1 is added to a prize ball counter (not shown) (S2651), and the lower first prize opening solenoid 210f is changed. Turn off (S2652). After the process of S2652, the lower first prize opening open flag 203j is turned off (S2642), and the lower first prize opening switch process (S2536) is ended.

  Therefore, when a ball wins the lower first prize opening 691, the process of S2652 is executed, and as a result, the opened electric accessory 691a of the lower first prize opening 691 is closed. .

  The lower second prize opening switch process (S2538), the lower third prize opening switch process (S2540), the lower fourth prize opening switch process (S2542), and the lower fifth prize opening switch process (S2544) are also described above. The same processing as the lower first prize opening switch processing (S2536) is performed. That is, in the lower first prize opening switch process (S2536), the “lower first prize opening solenoid 210f” is set to a prize opening solenoid (lower second to lower fifth prize opening corresponding to the prize opening switch that detected the passage of the ball. Solenoid 210g-210j), “lower first winning opening open flag 203j” is replaced with a winning opening open flag (lower second to lower fifth winning opening opened) corresponding to the winning opening switch that detected the passage of the ball. Flag 203k to 203n).

  Therefore, when a ball is won at the lower second winning opening 692, as a result of the lower second winning opening switch process (S2538), the opened electric accessory 692a of the lower second winning opening 692 is closed. . Similarly, when a ball is won at the lower third winning opening 693, the open third and lower winning opening 693 is closed as a result of the lower third winning opening switch process (S2540). The Further, when the ball has won the lower fourth prize opening 694, as a result of the lower fourth prize opening switch process (S2542), the opened electric accessory 694a of the lower fourth prize opening 694 is closed, When a ball is won at the lower fifth winning opening 695, the opened electric accessory 695a of the lower fifth winning opening 695 is closed as a result of the lower fifth winning opening switch process (S2544). Become.

  Next, the external information processing (S512) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the external information processing (S512) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the external information processing (S512) of the second embodiment, first, as in the process of S501 of the external information processing (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment, the external output buffer 203a is set to 0. A process of clearing is executed (S1521).

  After the process of S1521, it is confirmed whether the value of the specific operating port passage counter 203d is 0 (S1522). When the value of the specific operating port passage counter 203d is not 0, that is, when a value larger than 0 is confirmed (S1522: No) as a result of checking in the processing of S1522, whichever of the upper operating port 602 or the lower operating port 603 is Although there is a specific operation port passage signal that is not output (not transmitted, in standby) to the hall computer 262 even though the passage of the ball to is detected, in this case, the value of the signal output management counter 203c Is confirmed to be 0 (S1523).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 as a result of checking in the processing of S1523 (S1523: Yes), there is no specific operating port passing signal being managed (timed) by the signal output management counter 203c. Then, 15250 is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c (S1529), and time measurement (measurement) by the signal output management counter 203c is started.

  Here, since the value of the signal output management counter 203c is decremented (counted down) by 1 every 2 ms which is the execution interval of the external information processing (S512), the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1529 The value corresponds to a period of 30.5 s (30500 ms).

  Note that, as a result of the processing of S1529, the initial value corresponding to the period of 30.5 s set in the signal output management counter 203c is the first output period that is the initial setting with respect to one specific operation inlet incoming signal. This is a value corresponding to the total period of the period (30 s) and the second period (0.5 s) set in advance as an off period after the end of the output of the specific operation port passage signal.

  In the present embodiment, during the second period, which is the off period after the output of the specific operation port passage signal is finished, the player blinks the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal. The time period is set to 0.5 s so as to be an off period that can be visually distinguished in units of specific operation port passing signals adjacent in time series.

  Further, the hall computer 262 of the present embodiment is configured to output a control signal so as to blink the data display set around the pachinko machine over the reception period of the specific operation port passage signal (ON signal). ing. That is, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal from the main controller 110 corresponds to the blinking period of the data display. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the initial output period (first period) of the specific operation port passage signal to 30 s, data for one winning of the ball to the upper operation port 602 or the lower operation port 603 is obtained. The indicator will flash for a maximum of 30 seconds, which is the first period.

  After the processing of S1529, 1 is subtracted from the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d (S1530), and then 1 is set to the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passage signal in the external output buffer 203a (S1531).

  As a result of the processing of S1531, the external output processing (S201) in the main processing (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is performed with the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passing signal in the external output buffer 203a being set to 1. When executed, a specific operation port passage signal which is an ON signal is output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261.

  Therefore, when the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d is not 0 and the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0, it is the output timing of the specific operation port passage signal that has not been output or is waiting, A period of 30.5 s is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c in the process of S1529, and the output of the specific operation port passage signal is started.

  After the processing of S1531, other setting processing (S1528) is executed, and this external information processing (S512) is terminated. In the other setting process (S1528), setting data bits corresponding to signals other than the specific operation port passage signal in the external output buffer 203a (for example, a signal indicating that a special gaming state is being performed) are updated. After the other setting process (S1528) is executed, the external information processing (S512) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is not 0, that is, if a value greater than 0 is confirmed as a result of the confirmation in S1523 (S1523: No), it is not output to the hall computer 262 (not transmitted, This indicates that the specific output port passing signal is being managed by the signal output management counter 203c under a situation where there is a specific operating port pass signal (waiting). In such a case, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the signal output management counter 203c (S1524), and it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is greater than 15000 (S1525).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is larger than 15000 as a result of the confirmation in S1525 (S1525: Yes), after the initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c in S1529, that is, the specific operation port passage signal Since the period of 0.5 s has not yet elapsed after the start of the output, the process proceeds to S1531, and the output of the specific operation port passage signal is continued (S1531).

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 15000 or less as a result of checking in the processing of S1525 (S1525: No), the period of 0.5 s has elapsed since the output of the specific operation port passage signal was started. Then, it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 (S1526).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 250 or more as a result of checking in the processing of S1526 (S1526: No), in this case, there is a specific operating port passage signal that is not output to the hall computer 262. This indicates that the specific operation port passage signal is being output and that at least 0.5 s has elapsed since the start of output. In such a case, 250 is reset in the signal output management counter 203c (S1527), and the flow proceeds to other setting processing (S1528).

  In this case (that is, when 250 is reset in the signal output management counter 203c by the process of S1527), the process of S1531 is not executed, so that the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passage signal is 0 ( Off). As a result, when the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 8) of the next cycle is executed, the signal in the OFF state is not the specific operation port passage signal (ON signal) but the external output terminal plate 261. To the hall computer 262.

  Therefore, when there is a specific operation port passage signal being output and there is a non-output specific operation port passage signal, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal being output is preset as the third period. If it is 0.5 s or more, regardless of the initial value set in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing in S1529, the specific operation is performed after 250 is reset in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing in S1527. The output of the mouth passing signal is interrupted.

  In the present embodiment, in the third period, the player visually distinguishes the blinking of the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal in units of the specific operation port passage signal. The period is set to 0.5 s to obtain a period to obtain.

  On the other hand, if the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 as a result of checking in the processing of S1526 (S1526: Yes), the second period (0.5 s) after the output of the specific operation port passage signal is completed. Therefore, while the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passage signal is kept 0 (off), the flow proceeds to other setting processing (S1528).

  Here, as described above, when 250 is reset in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1527, in the external information processing (S512) executed at the next timing (that is, after 2 ms), the signal output management is performed. Since the value of the counter 203c is 249, the determination process in S1526 proceeds to the No side. That is, after 250 is reset in the signal output management counter 203c by the processing of S1527 and the output of the specific operation port passage signal is interrupted, 0.5 s is set as the off period after the output of the specific operation port passage signal ends. It will be timed.

  If the value of the specific operation port passage counter 203d is 0 (S1522: Yes) as a result of confirmation in S1522, it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1532).

  When the value of the signal output management counter 203c is not 0 as a result of checking in the process of S1532, that is, when a value greater than 0 is confirmed (S1532: No), it is not output to the hall computer 262 (not transmitted, waiting) ) Indicates that the specific operation port passage signal is being managed by the signal output management counter 203c under the condition where there is no specific operation port passage signal. In such a case, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the signal output management counter 203c (S1533), and it is confirmed whether the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 (S1534).

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 250 or more as a result of checking in the processing of S1534 (S1534: No), in such a case, there is no specific operating port passing signal that is not output to the hall computer 262. Since the specific operating port passage signal is being output, the process proceeds to S1531. As a result, the output of the specific operation port passage signal is continued.

  On the other hand, when the value of the signal output management counter 203c is smaller than 250 as a result of checking in the processing of S1534 (S1531: Yes), the second period (0.5 s) after the end of the output of the specific operating port passage signal is completed. Since the time is being measured, the process proceeds to another setting process (S1528) while the output state of the setting data bit corresponding to the specific operation port passage signal is kept 0 (off).

  Therefore, when there is no specific operation port passing signal that has not been output to the hall computer 262, a first period (30 s) that is an initial setting output period for one specific operation port entering ball passing signal; Management of both the second period (0.5 s), which is the off period after the end of output of the specific operation port passage signal, is achieved by setting the initial value to the signal output management counter 203c once in the process of S1529. It can be done.

  If the value of the signal output management counter 203c is 0 (S1532: Yes), there is no specific operation port passing signal to be output nor a specific operation port passing signal to be managed for a period, so other setting processing ( The process proceeds to S1508).

  Thus, according to the external information processing (S512) executed by the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, the specific operation port passage signal is output in a situation where there is an unoutput specific operation port passage signal. In this case, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal is secured at least for a period (0.5 s in the present embodiment) set in advance as the third period, and the entire output period is set to the initial set value (this In the embodiment, adjustment is made to be shorter than 30 s). That is, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal is adjusted to a period that is equal to or more than a preset third period and less than the initial set value (first period) of the output period.

  In the situation where there is a non-output specific operating port passage signal, the specific operation port passing signal is output as follows: (1) The specific operation in the situation where no non-output specific operation port passage signal remains When a non-output specific operation port passage signal is generated during the output of the mouth passage signal, or (2) even if the output of the specific operation port passage signal is newly started, the non-output specific operation port passage signal Is assumed to remain.

  Here, in the case of the above (1), from the start of the output of the specific operating port passage signal until the generation of the non-output specific operating port passage signal, (external information processing (S512)) ( The processing is executed in the order of S1522: Yes) → (S1532: No) → S1533 → (S1534: No) → S1531, but due to the occurrence of a non-output specific operating port passage signal (S1522: No) → (S1532: No) → After the processing is executed in the order of S1524, the confirmation processing of S1525 is executed.

  At this time, if the specific operation port passage signal being output has already been output for the third period (0.5 s in the present embodiment), the branch process of No in S1525 is executed. The output of the specific operation port passage signal is terminated without waiting for the elapse of the initial setting output period (first period, 30 s in the present embodiment), and the off period (second period, 0 in the present embodiment). .5s), the value of the signal output management counter 203c is reset by the processing of S1527.

  On the other hand, if the output period of the specific operation port passage signal being output has not yet reached the third period (0.5 s in the present embodiment), the Yes branch process in S1525 is executed. As a result, at least the third period is secured as the output period of the specific operation port passage signal.

  In the case of (2) above, after the output of the specific operation port passage signal is started, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal being output is the third period (0.5 s in this embodiment). Since the branching process of Yes in S1525 is executed until it reaches, as a result, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal is only the third period (0.5 s in this embodiment).

  Next, referring to FIG. 25, the specific operation port passage signal output from the pachinko machine of the second embodiment to the hall computer 262 (the output state of the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is 1). The output timing will be described. FIG. 25 is a timing chart illustrating the output timing of the specific operation port passage signal in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

  In FIG. 25 (a), the passage interval of the sphere to the upper stage operating port 602 or the lower stage operating port 603 is set as an initial value in the signal output management counter 203c by the process of S1529 in the above-described external information processing (see FIG. 24). It is a timing chart which illustrated the case where it is more than the last period (30.5s).

  As shown in FIG. 25 (a), a detection signal sg11 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the upper stage operating port 602 is output from the upper stage operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208). When the passage of the ball to the operation port 602 is detected by the upper operation port switch, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the 1 detection signal sg11 (ie, one win) The output of the one specific operation port passage signal ON11 to is started.

  In starting the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON11, the processing of S1529 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24) is executed, and an initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c. The initial value set at this time is set in advance as a first period (30 s), which is an initial setting output period for one specific operation port incoming ball passing signal, and an off period after the output of the specific operation port passing signal ends. The value is equivalent to the sum period with the second period (0.5 s).

  During the time counting by the signal output management counter 203c, the passage of the sphere to the upper stage operating port 602 or the lower stage operating port 603 is not detected, and the specific passing port is determined by the determination processing in S1534 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24). When it is determined that the output period of the passing signal has passed the initial setting period (30 s in this embodiment), the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is returned from 1 to 0, thereby passing the specific operation port. The output of the signal ON11 is finished.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, a value corresponding to 30.5 s, which is the sum of the output period (30 s) of the initial setting for the specific operation port passage signal ON11 and the off period OF11, is obtained by the process of S1529. Since the signal output management counter 203c is set as an initial value, the value of the signal output management counter 203c does not reach 0 even when the signal output management counter 203c measures the output period of 30 s. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the signal output management counter 203c does not set an initial value for measuring the off period OF11 even after the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON11 is completed. The off period OF11 (in this embodiment, 0.5 s) can be continuously counted.

  The detection signal sg12 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the lower operation port 602 is not managed by the signal output management counter 203c with respect to the detection signal sg11. ), The process of S1529 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24) is executed in the same manner as when the detection signal sg11 is output, and 30.5 s is set as the initial value in the signal output management counter 203c. Is set. As a result, similarly to the period management for the detection signal sg11, even after the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON12 is completed, the initial value for measuring the off period OF12 is not set in the signal output management counter 203c. The off period OF12 can be timed subsequently.

  FIG. 25B is a timing chart exemplifying a case where a non-output specific operating port passage signal is generated during the output of the specific operating port passage signal in a situation where no non-output specific operation port passage signal remains. .

  As shown in FIG. 25B, when a detection signal sg21 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the upper stage operating port 602 is output from the upper stage operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208), an external output The corresponding setting data bit in the buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the output of one specific operating port passage signal ON21 for one detection signal sg21 is started.

  On the other hand, the detection signal sg22 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the lower operation port 603 is output to the lower operation port before the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON21 reaches 30s, which is the default output period. When output from a switch (a part of various switches 208), the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a, even before the initial output period is reached, according to the output timing of the detection signal sg22 Is returned from 1 to 0, and the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON21 is terminated.

  That is, in such a case, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON21 is secured at least for the output period (third period) of 0.5 s by the determination process of S1525 in the external information processing (see FIG. 24). By the determination processing in S1526, the period is adjusted (shortened) to a period of less than 30 s, which is the default output period (first period).

  After the end of the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON21, after waiting for the passage of the OFF period OF22 of 0.5 s, the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON22 with respect to the detection signal sg22 output during the output of the specific operating port passage signal ON21 Is started (that is, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1).

  Here, the detection signal sg23 (ON signal) indicating that the ball has passed through the upper stage operating port 602 before the output period of the specific operating port passing signal ON22 reaches 30s which is the default output period is the upper stage operating port. When output from the switch (a part of the various switches 208), the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON22 is set to 0.5s as in the adjustment of the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON22 described above. The output period is adjusted to less than 30 s while ensuring.

  Then, after the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON22 is completed and the 0.5 second off period OF22 has elapsed, the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON23 with respect to the detection signal sg23 is started. At this time, if the passage of a new ball to the upper stage operating port 602 or the lower stage operating port 603 is not detected, the specific operating port passing signal ON23 is turned off after the elapse of the output period of 30 s.

  According to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, if a non-output specific operation port passage signal is generated during the output of the specific operation port passage signal in a situation where an unoutput specific operation port passage signal does not remain, As in the case of the operation port passage signals ON21 and ON22, the output period is shortened from the initial set value of 30 s.

  Therefore, even if a non-output specific operation port passage signal is generated during the output of the specific operation port passage signal in a situation where no non-output specific operation port passage signal remains, the detection signal and the specific operation for the detection signal The time difference from the output timing of the mouth passage signal can be minimized.

  In addition, as described above, the off period is set as the second period in advance even though the time difference between the detection signal and the output timing of the specific operation port passage signal with respect to the detection signal is minimized. .5s is secured, the player can visually blink the data indicator controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal in units of the specific operation port passage signal adjacent in time series. Can be distinguished.

  FIG. 25C is a timing chart illustrating a case where a specific operation port passage signal that has not been output still remains even when the output of the specific operation port passage signal is newly started.

  As shown in FIG. 25C, when a detection signal sg31 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the upper stage operating port 602 is output from the upper stage operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208), an external output The corresponding setting data bit in the buffer 203a is inverted from 0 to 1, and the output of one specific operation port passage signal ON31 for one detection signal sg31 is started.

  Here, the detection signal sg32 (ON signal) indicating that the sphere has passed through the upper operation port 602 is again operated in the upper stage before the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON31 reaches 30s, which is the default output period. When output from the mouth switch, the output period of the specific operation port passage signal ON31 is ensured to be an output period (third period) of at least 0.5 s according to the output timing of the detection signal sg32, and the initial setting is performed. The output period (first period) is adjusted (shortened) to a period of less than 30 s.

  The output of the specific operation port passage signal ON32 with respect to the detection signal sg32 is started after an elapse of an OFF period OF31 of 0.5 s from the end of the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON31.

  At this time, a detection signal sg33 (ON signal) indicating that a ball has passed through the lower stage operating port 603 was output from the lower stage operating port switch (a part of the various switches 208) during the OFF period OF31 of 0.5 s. In this case, even after the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON32 with respect to the detection signal sg32, the specific operation port passage signal ON33 with respect to the detection signal sg33 remains on standby.

  In the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, in this situation, the branch operation of Yes in S1525 of the external information processing (see FIG. 24) is executed, so that the specific operation port passage signal ON32 is output for 0.5 s. Thereafter, the No branch process in S1526 is executed, the corresponding setting data bit in the external output buffer 203a is returned from 1 to 0, and the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON32 is ended.

  Then, after the end of the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON32, the output of the specific operation port passage signal ON33 with respect to the detection signal sg33 is started after the elapse of the off period OF32 of 0.5 s. If the passage of a new ball to the upper stage operating port 602 or the lower stage operating port 603 is not detected after the output of the specific operating port passing signal ON33 is started, the specific operating port passing signal ON33 is turned off after the elapse of the output period of 30 s. The

  According to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, even when the output of the specific operation port passage signal is newly started, when the specific operation port passage signal that has not been output still remains, as in the case of the specific operation port passage signal ON32 The output period is shortened to 0.5 s preset as the third period. Therefore, the waiting period of the specific operation port passage signal ON33 with respect to the detection signal sg33 can be minimized.

  Therefore, even if the output of the specific operation port passage signal is newly started, even if a specific operation port passage signal that has not been output still remains, the detection signal and the specific operation port passage signal corresponding to the detection signal The time difference from the output timing can be minimized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the third period visually distinguishes the flashing of the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal in units of the specific operation port passage signal. Since it is set to 0.5 s, the player can visually blink the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal in units of the specific operation port passage signal. Can be distinguished.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, when the specific operation port passage signal is output, the signal output management counter 203c, which is one counter, has an initial output period (first output). And a second period set in advance as an off period after the output of the specific operating port passage signal is completed is set as an initial value. For this reason, even after the output of the initial setting for the specific operation port passage signal has passed and the output of such a signal is terminated, the off period is continued without setting an initial value for counting the subsequent off period. Can be timed.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when there is no specific operation port passing signal that is not output to the hall computer 262, the initial output period for one specific operation port entering signal is passed. Management of both a certain first period and a second period that is an off period after the output of the specific operation port passage signal is completed is performed at the start timing of the second period by only one signal output management counter 203c. This can be achieved without having to set an initial value. Therefore, the control load applied to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the second period, which is the off period after the end of the output of the specific operation port passage signal, is the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal by the player. The blinking is set to be an off period that can be visually distinguished in units of specific operation port passing signals that are adjacent in time series. In the second period, the hall computer 262 is specified to be adjacent in time series. Any period that can distinguish the operation port passage signal (for example, a period of 52 ms as in the first embodiment) may be used. By setting the second period managed by the signal output management counter 203c to be a period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the specific operation port passing signals that are adjacent in time series, the hall computer 262 is adjacent in time series. It is possible to reliably detect the specific operation port passing signal.

  Similarly, in the present embodiment, in the third period, the player visually blinks the data display controlled by the hall computer 262 that has received the specific operation port passage signal in units of the specific operation port passage signal. However, the third period may be a period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish the specific operation port passage signal (for example, a period of 52 ms as in the first embodiment). That's fine. By setting the third period managed by the signal output management counter 203c to be a period in which the hall computer 262 can distinguish between the specific operation port passing signals adjacent in time series, the hall computer 262 has one specific operation port. Each passing signal can be reliably detected.

  In the present embodiment, the hall computer 262 uses the specific operation port passage signal output from the external output terminal plate 261, and the data display device is used during the output period of the specific operation port passage signal (that is, during the ON period). By blinking and turning off the data display during the off period, a display substantially corresponding to the hit state of the pachinko machine can be performed. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, it is possible to cope with a state (for example, a hit state) generated in the pachinko machine without providing a counter for counting the period during which the data display is blinked or performing control for timing the period. The number of occurrences of the state (for example, the number of winnings that generate the winning state) can be grasped while performing the display.

  The present invention has been described based on one embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the initial state of the output state of the signal output from the main controller 110 is set to 0 (off), and the first entrance port passing signal and the specific operation port passing signal are inverted from the initial state. 1 (on) is maintained over the output period. However, when the initial state of the output state is 1, the first entrance is obtained by maintaining the inverted 0 of the initial state over the output period. It is good also as a passage signal and a specific operation port passage signal.

  In each of the above embodiments, when outputting the first entrance opening passage signal and the specific operation opening passage signal, the initial value is set in the signal output management counter 203c, and the value of the signal output management counter 203c is subtracted. In this way, the first period and the second period are timed (managed). However, by adding the signal output management counter 203c from 0, both the first period and the second period are set. You may comprise so that it may time. Specifically, with the start of the output of the first entrance port passage signal and the specific operation port passage signal, the signal output management counter 203c starts timing from 0 and monitors whether or not the first period has been reached. If it is determined that the first period has been reached, the signal may be turned off, and further, it may be configured to monitor whether the sum period of the first period and the second period has been reached.

  Moreover, in each said embodiment, although the 1st entrance opening passage signal and the specific operation opening passage signal were illustrated as a signal which should be managed, this invention is applicable with respect to various signals. In addition, like the first entrance opening passage signal and the specific operation opening passage signal, the passage opening that creates (or has the possibility of) a state more advantageous to the player than the normal state is triggered by the passage of the ball. When applied to a signal output triggered by the passage of a ball, the number of times the ball has passed to a passage that creates (or has the possibility of) an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state 262 can be surely grasped, and such data can be used by the hall manager for purposes such as nail adjustment and fraud monitoring.

  In addition, when the variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, a signal is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262, and this signal is adopted as a signal to be managed. May be. When the signal indicating the start of the fluctuation display is adopted as a signal to be managed, for example, every time the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 10) is executed, the signal is displayed in the same manner as the external information processing (see FIG. 13). What is necessary is just to comprise so that an output process may be performed. Alternatively, every time the variation start process (see FIG. 10) is executed, the value of the first entrance opening passage counter 203b is subtracted, and when the value of the first entrance entrance passage counter 203b is subtracted, the external information You may comprise so that the signal output process similar to a process (refer FIG. 13) may be performed.

  Moreover, in each said embodiment, it is the management apparatus installed in the exterior of the pachinko machine (pachinko machine 10) from the main control apparatus 110, such as a 1st entrance opening passage signal and a specific operation port passage signal. Although the case of outputting to the hall computer 262 has been illustrated, the present invention can also be applied to output of signals from the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 to the hall computer 262. The present invention can also be applied to output of signals inside the pachinko machine, such as output of signals from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the ten electric components 661a, 662a, 663a, 664a, 665a, 691a, 692a, 693a, 694a, 695a are configured to be driven by the corresponding winning solenoids 210a to 210j. However, instead of the electric accessory, an accessory that operates by a mechanical link mechanism may be arranged.

  For example, when a ball is won in the upper stage operation port 602, the mechanical objects disposed at the entrances of the upper first to upper fifth winning ports 661 to 665 are all opened at the same time by the mechanical link mechanism. When a ball is won in the first to upper fifth operation ports 651 to 655, it is arranged at the entrance of the corresponding upper winning port (upper first to fifth fifth winning ports 661 to 665) by a mechanical link mechanism. When the winning combination is released and the ball wins the upper first to upper fifth winning openings 661 to 665, the upper winning opening (upper first to upper fifth winning openings) won by a mechanical link mechanism. 661 to 665) may be configured to close the accessory disposed at the entrance.

  Similarly, when a ball wins the lower stage operation port 603, the mechanical objects respectively disposed at the entrances of the lower first to upper fifth winning ports 691 to 695 are opened simultaneously, When a ball wins the lower first to upper fifth operation ports 681 to 685, it is arranged at the entrance of the corresponding lower winning port (lower first to lower fifth winning ports 691 to 695) by a mechanical link mechanism. When the provided role is released and a ball is awarded to the lower first to lower fifth winning openings 691 to 695, the lower winning opening (lower first to lower fifth winning prizes) won by a mechanical link mechanism. You may comprise so that the accessory arrange | positioned at the inlet_port | entrance of the opening | mouth 691-695) may close.

  In the first embodiment, all the balls that have entered (winned) into the first entrance 64 are counted by the first entrance passage counter 203b, but are stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 ( You may comprise so that only the ball | bowl to be put on hold may be counted. That is, only when the number N of the operation reservation balls is less than four (the number N of operation reservation balls N = 0 to 4), the first entry port passage counter 203b with respect to the entry (winning) to the first entry port 64. It is good also as a structure which adds 1 to. Specifically, in the start winning process (see FIG. 12), the process of S602 may be executed after the Yes branch process in S603, not after the Yes branch process in S601.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Below, the gaming machine and the modification of the present invention are shown. A state detecting means for detecting occurrence of a predetermined state during a game in which a game medium is passed in a game area and a game value is given to a player according to establishment of a predetermined condition; and the state detecting means detects the state In response to the occurrence of one state, the signal output state is reversed from the first state and maintained for a preset first period, and then reversed again to return to the first state. In a gaming machine comprising a signal output means for outputting a signal, when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means, an elapsed period from the start of the output of the state generation signal is measured A period measurement means, a first arrival determination means capable of determining whether the elapsed period measured by the period measurement means has reached the first period, and the elapsed period by the first arrival determination means. Subsequently, after it is determined that the first period has been reached, the elapsed period measured by the period measuring means is a sum period of the first period and a preset second period. A gaming machine 1 comprising second arrival determination means capable of determining whether or not the vehicle has arrived.

  According to the gaming machine 1, when the state detection means detects the occurrence of a predetermined state during the game in which the game medium is passed through the game area and the game value is given to the player according to the establishment of the predetermined condition. In other words, one state generation signal is output by the signal output means with respect to the occurrence of one detected state. Here, the one state generation signal is generated by inverting the output state of the signal from the first state and maintaining it for a preset first period, and then inverting it again to return to the first state. .

  In such a case, when the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), the elapsed period from the start of the output of the state generation signal Measurement is started by the period measuring means. When measurement of the elapsed period by the period measuring unit is started, first, the first arrival determination unit determines whether the elapsed period has reached the first period, that is, the signal output state is inverted again and the first It is determined whether it is time to return to the state.

  Then, when the first arrival determining means determines that the elapsed period measured by the period measuring means has reached the first period, the elapsed period has subsequently reached the second period set in advance. Is determined. Here, the second period is a period in which a state generation signal can be distinguished in time series by an arithmetic device (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine) that is the output destination of the state generation signal. In this case, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be reliably discriminated by the output destination arithmetic unit. As a result, it is possible to reliably cause the output destination arithmetic device to detect the occurrence of the state detected by the state detecting means.

  Therefore, both the management of the output period of the state generation signal (that is, the first period) and the management of the predetermined period (that is, the second period) after the end of the output of the state generation signal are measured for each period. This can be realized without performing processing for setting the period measurement means in accordance with the start timing. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load associated with outputting the state generation signal to the arithmetic device every time the state is generated.

  The passage from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means to the first period extends from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means to the sum period of the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as counters and timers as period measuring means, and consumption of storage capacity in the storage device can be suppressed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the state detection means described in the gaming machine 1 includes a first entrance port switch, an upper stage operating port switch, and an upper stage operating port switch (none of which are shown). The signal output means described in the machine 1 corresponds to external information processing (S505, S512) and external output processing (S201), and the period measurement means described in the gaming machine 1 includes the signal output management counter 203c. , And the processing of S1504 and S1533 for counting down the signal output management counter 203c, and the first arrival determination means described in the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the processing of S1506 and S1534 and is described in the gaming machine 1. The second arrival determination means corresponds to the processing of S1502 and S1532.

  In the gaming machine 1, when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output unit, the period measuring unit uses a value corresponding to a total period of the first period and the second period as an initial value. Period setting means for setting the elapsed period by subtracting the value set by the period setting means after the signal output means starts outputting the state generation signal. A gaming machine 2 characterized by being measured.

  According to the gaming machine 2, when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means (that is, the output state of the signal is reversed from the first state), the first period and the second period A value corresponding to the sum period is set as an initial value in the period setting means. Thereafter, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started, the elapsed period from the start of the output of the state generation signal is measured by the period measurement means by a method of subtracting the value set by the period setting means. The

  Therefore, since the value set as the initial value in the period measuring unit is a value corresponding to the total period of the first period and the second period, by setting the initial value once in the period measuring unit, It is possible to measure both the progress up to the first period and the total period of the first period and the second period, and the control associated with outputting the state generation signal to the arithmetic unit every time the state occurs The load can be reduced.

  Further, from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means to the first period by the period measuring means in which the value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is set as the initial value. Since both the elapsed time and the elapsed time up to the sum period of the first period and the second period can be measured, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as a counter and a timer as the period measuring means, and the storage device The consumption of storage capacity can be suppressed.

  In each embodiment described above, the processing of S1505 and S1529 corresponds to the period setting means described in the gaming machine 2.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the second period is a period in which an arithmetic unit that is an output destination of the state generation signal can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series. 3

  According to the gaming machine 3, the second period after the completion of the output of the state generation signal is a time series in which the arithmetic device that is the output destination of the state generation signal (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine) Since it is a period in which adjacent state generation signals can be distinguished, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be reliably distinguished by the output destination arithmetic unit. As a result, it is possible to reliably cause the output destination arithmetic device to detect the occurrence of the state detected by the state detecting means.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the second period is a shortest period in which the arithmetic unit can distinguish the state occurrence signals adjacent in time series or a neighboring period longer than the shortest period. A gaming machine 4 characterized.

  According to the gaming machine 4, the second period is the shortest period in which the output destination arithmetic unit can distinguish the state occurrence signals adjacent in time series or a period in the vicinity of the shortest period. The difference between the timing and the output timing of the state generation signal can be reduced. Accordingly, not only can the output destination computing device reliably distinguish adjacent state occurrence signals in time series, but also the maximum time period between the end of output of the state occurrence signal and the start of output of the next state occurrence signal can be maximized or almost maximized. Since it can be shortened to the limit, the data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  The gaming machine 5 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 4, wherein the first period and the second period are substantially the same.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the first period and the second period are substantially the same, that is, after the output of the state generation signal and the output of the state generation signal, the next state generation signal is output to the arithmetic unit that is the output destination. Since the periods necessary for distinguishing between them are substantially the same, management of each period can be facilitated. Further, the difference between the generation timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal can be reduced, and the data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  Here, by setting the second period as a period in which the state generation signal adjacent to the arithmetic unit that is the output destination of the state generation signal in time series can be distinguished, the management of each period is facilitated. The state generation signals adjacent in series can be surely distinguished from each other by the output destination arithmetic unit. In particular, the difference between the generation timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal is reduced by setting the second period to be the shortest period in which the signal can be detected by the output destination arithmetic unit or a period in the vicinity of the shortest period. Data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 5, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit is started, before the elapsed period has been reached by the first arrival determination unit, or If the occurrence of the state is newly detected by the state detection unit before the second arrival determination unit determines that the elapsed period has reached the sum period, the second arrival determination unit Waiting means for waiting for the output of the state occurrence signal by the signal output means for the occurrence of the newly detected state until it is determined that the elapsed period has reached the sum period. A gaming machine 6 characterized.

  According to the gaming machine 6, after the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means, before the first arrival determination means determines that the elapsed period has reached the summing period, or by the second arrival determination means If the occurrence of a state is newly detected by the state detection means before it is determined that the elapsed period has reached the summing period, output of the state generation signal by the signal output means for the occurrence of the newly detected state However, the standby unit waits until it is determined by the second arrival determination unit that the elapsed period has reached the total period. Therefore, the state detected every moment can be reliably detected by the output destination arithmetic unit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first entrance opening counter 203b corresponds to the waiting means described in the gaming machine 6.

  In any one of the gaming machines 1 to 6, the state in which the occurrence is detected by the state detecting means creates a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state or triggered by the passage of the game medium. The gaming machine 7 is characterized in that the game medium passes through a specific passage section.

  According to the gaming machine 7, the passage of the game medium is used as an opportunity to create a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state or has the possibility (for example, a state that is advantageous to the player as a result of the lottery) ) The passage of the game medium to the specific passage portion is detected as the occurrence of the state by the state detection means. Therefore, it is possible to allow the output destination management device to grasp the number of times that the game medium passes to a specific passing section that creates or has a possibility that is advantageous to the player compared to the normal state, and manages such data in the hall This can be used by a person for purposes such as nail adjustment and fraud monitoring.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first entrance 64, the upper specific operation port 602, and the lower specific operation port 603 are illustrated as the specific passing portions described in the gaming machine 7.

  The gaming machine 8 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  The gaming machine 9 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine 10 according to any one of the gaming machines 1 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, centralized management by a hall computer has been carried out for gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slots installed in amusement halls (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7-59935 and Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-26883). 2005-334218). Examples of such centralized management include, for example, a starting opening prize signal indicating that a gaming ball has won a predetermined winning opening (for example, a starting opening that generates a chance to win a big hit by winning a gaming ball) Signals corresponding to various states that occur during the game, such as a winning ball signal indicating that the ball has been paid out by winning the winning opening, and a big hit signal indicating the big hit state (hereinafter, this signal is referred to as a “state generation signal”). Is output from each gaming machine to the hall computer, and the hall computer that receives these signals receives a number of balls per jackpot based on the received signals, One example is calculating the number of balls (base) and outputting the result to a monitor or paper.
As described above, data output from the hall computer, for example, data such as the number of balls played per jackpot, the number of balls played other than during the jackpot, and the number of game balls that have passed through the start opening, obtain appropriate profits. For the purpose, it is used by hall managers for nail adjustment of pachinko machines and fraud monitoring.
Here, the output of the state generation signal from each gaming machine to the hall computer is started by generating an on signal in which the output state is inverted when a predetermined state occurs, and then the hall computer transmits the on signal. It is terminated by continuing to output the ON signal for a first period (for example, 0.5 s) in which the output state can be detected and then inverting the output state again.
On the other hand, in order for the hall computer to distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series, after the output of the state generation signal by inverting the output state again, the output state is changed to a second period (for example, 0 .5s) need to continue. Therefore, when the gaming machine outputs the state generation signal to the hall computer, the first period that is the output period of the ON signal that becomes the state generation signal can be distinguished from the state generation signal that the hall computer is adjacent in time series. The gaming machine is required to manage the second period, which is the period.
One common method for the gaming machine to manage the first period and the second period is as follows. The first counter that measures the first period (that is, the output period of the state generation signal), A second counter that measures two periods (that is, a period necessary for the hall computer to distinguish the next state generation signal after completion of the output of the state generation signal), and measures each of these periods. Is the method.
In such a method, for example, when the occurrence of a predetermined state is detected and the output of the state generation signal is started by the generation of the ON signal in which the output state is inverted, the output of the state generation signal is started. An initial value corresponding to one period is set in the first counter, and the first period is measured by sequentially subtracting the value of the first counter. When the value of the first counter indicates zero, that is, when the output of the state generation signal is finished, the second period is set in the second counter, and the second counter The second period is measured by sequentially subtracting the values of.
Alternatively, there is a method in which the gaming machine manages both the first period and the second period with one counter as another method for managing the first period and the second period. In such a method, for example, when it is detected that a predetermined state has occurred and the output of the state generation signal is started by generating an ON signal in which the output state is inverted, the first period is set in the counter, The first period is measured by sequentially subtracting the counter value. When the counter value indicates zero, that is, when the output of the state generation signal is completed, the second period is set in the counter, and the counter value is sequentially subtracted. The period of 2 is measured.
However, any of the above-described methods requires processing for setting the first period and the second period in a counter or timer according to the measurement start timing of each period, and the control by the control device is complicated. There was a problem of becoming. In particular, in the former method, it is necessary to provide a plurality of counters and timers according to the number of periods to be managed, and the consumption of storage capacity in the storage device increases.
The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine that effectively reduces the control load accompanying the output of a state generation signal to an external device such as a hall computer. It is an object.
<Means>
To achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 has a predetermined state during a game in which a gaming medium is passed through the gaming area and a gaming value is given to the player according to establishment of a predetermined condition. State detection means for detecting occurrence and the occurrence of one state detected by the state detection means, the signal output state is inverted from the first state and maintained for a preset first period. And a signal output means for outputting one state generation signal by inverting again and returning to the first state, when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means. A period measuring unit that measures an elapsed period from when the output of the state generation signal is started, and a first that can determine whether the elapsed period measured by the period measuring unit has reached the first period Reach The elapsed period measured by the period measuring unit is determined to be the first period after the determining unit and the first arrival determining unit determine that the elapsed period has reached the first period. And a second arrival determination means capable of determining whether or not the total period of the second period set in advance has been reached.
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output unit, the first period and the second period Period setting means for setting in the period measurement means a value corresponding to the total period of the initial value as the initial value, the period measurement means after the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means The elapsed period is measured by a method of subtracting the value set by the means.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, in the second period, the state in which the arithmetic device that is the output destination of the state generation signal is adjacent in time series This is a period in which the generated signals can be distinguished.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the first period and the second period are substantially the same.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, occurrence of a predetermined state during a game in which a game medium is passed in the game area and a game value is given to the player according to establishment of a predetermined condition is state detection means. Is detected by the signal output means, one state generation signal is output by the signal output means with respect to the occurrence of the detected one state. Here, the one state generation signal is generated by inverting the output state of the signal from the first state and maintaining it for a preset first period, and then inverting it again to return to the first state. .
In such a case, when the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), the elapsed period from the start of the output of the state generation signal Measurement is started by the period measuring means. When measurement of the elapsed period by the period measuring unit is started, first, the first arrival determination unit determines whether the elapsed period has reached the first period, that is, the signal output state is inverted again and the first It is determined whether it is time to return to the state.
Then, when the first arrival determining means determines that the elapsed period measured by the period measuring means has reached the first period, the elapsed period has subsequently reached the second period set in advance. Is determined. Here, the second period is a period in which a state generation signal can be distinguished in time series by an arithmetic device (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine) that is the output destination of the state generation signal. In this case, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be reliably discriminated by the output destination arithmetic unit. As a result, it is possible to reliably cause the output destination arithmetic device to detect the occurrence of the state detected by the state detecting means.
Therefore, both the management of the output period of the state generation signal (that is, the first period) and the management of the predetermined period (that is, the second period) after the end of the output of the state generation signal are measured for each period. This can be realized without performing processing for setting the period measurement means in accordance with the start timing. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the control load associated with outputting the state generation signal to the arithmetic device every time the state is generated.
The passage from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means to the first period extends from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means to the sum period of the first period and the second period. Therefore, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as counters and timers as period measuring means, and there is an effect that consumption of storage capacity in the storage device can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. When output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means (that is, the output state of the signal is inverted from the first state), a value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is It is set in the period setting means as an initial value. Thereafter, after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means is started, the elapsed period from the start of the output of the state generation signal is measured by the period measurement means by a method of subtracting the value set by the period setting means. The
Therefore, since the value set as the initial value in the period measuring unit is a value corresponding to the total period of the first period and the second period, by setting the initial value once in the period measuring unit, It is possible to measure both the progress up to the first period and the total period of the first period and the second period, and the control associated with outputting the state generation signal to the arithmetic unit every time the state occurs There is an effect that the load can be reduced.
Further, from the start of the output of the state generation signal by the signal output means to the first period by the period measuring means in which the value corresponding to the sum period of the first period and the second period is set as the initial value. Since both the elapsed time and the elapsed time up to the sum period of the first period and the second period can be measured, there is no need to provide a plurality of time-measurable components such as a counter and a timer as the period measuring means, and the storage device There is an effect that consumption of storage capacity can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. The second period after the completion of the output of the state generation signal distinguishes the state generation signals adjacent to each other in time series by the arithmetic device that is the output destination of the state generation signal (for example, a management device installed outside the gaming machine) Since the possible period is set, the state generation signals adjacent in time series can be surely distinguished from each other by the output destination arithmetic unit. As a result, there is an effect that the generation of the state detected by the state detection unit can be surely detected by the output destination arithmetic device.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effect is achieved. The first period and the second period are substantially the same, that is, it is necessary for the output state arithmetic unit to be able to distinguish the output state of the state generation signal from the next state generation signal after the end of the output of the state generation signal. This is advantageous in that the management of each period can be facilitated. In addition, the difference between the occurrence timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal can be reduced, and the data acquisition efficiency can be improved.
Here, by setting the second period as a period in which the state generation signal adjacent to the arithmetic unit that is the output destination of the state generation signal in time series can be distinguished, the management of each period is facilitated. The state generation signals adjacent in series can be surely distinguished from each other by the output destination arithmetic unit. In particular, the difference between the generation timing of each state and the output timing of the state generation signal is reduced by setting the second period to be the shortest period in which the signal can be detected by the output destination arithmetic unit or a period in the vicinity of the shortest period. Data acquisition efficiency can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
203c Signal output management counter (period measuring means)

Claims (4)

A state detecting means for detecting occurrence of a predetermined state during a game in which a game medium is passed in a game area and a game value is given to a player according to establishment of a predetermined condition; and the state detecting means detects the state In response to the occurrence of one state, the signal output state is reversed from the first state and maintained for a preset first period, and then reversed again to return to the first state. In a gaming machine comprising signal output means for outputting a signal,
When the output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output unit, a period measurement unit that measures an elapsed period from the start of the output of the state generation signal;
First arrival determination means capable of determining whether the elapsed period measured by the period measurement means has reached the first period;
The elapsed period measured by the period measuring unit is set in advance as the first period after the first arrival determining unit determines that the elapsed period has reached the first period. And a second arrival determination means capable of determining whether or not the sum period of the second period has been reached. A period setting for setting in the period measuring means a value corresponding to a sum period of the first period and the second period as an initial value when output of the state generation signal is started by the signal output means With means,
The period measuring unit measures the elapsed period by a method of subtracting a value set by the period setting unit after the output of the state generation signal by the signal output unit is started. The gaming machine according to claim 1.   The game according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the second period is a period in which an arithmetic unit that is an output destination of the state generation signal can distinguish the state generation signals adjacent in time series. Machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first period and the second period are substantially the same.

Images